The Awaited Imām

Transcription

The Awaited Imām

The
Awaited Imām
Mahdī ()
Dr Muhammad Tahir-ul-Qadri
Minhaj-ul-Quran Publications
Lah ore, Pakistan
I
Copyr ight © 2003 by Minh aj- ul-Quran Intern ationa l,
L ahore, Pak istan . All r ights re serve d. No pa rt of this book
may be use d or rep ro duce d in any manner wh atsoev er
witho ut pr ior p erm ission, exc ept in ca se of brief
quotation s e m bo die d in cr itica l artic le s an d rev ie ws.
Re se arch Assistant s: Prof Iftikha r A. Sh eikh, Ja we d I qba l,
M . Faroo q Ran a
Wor d pro ce sse d By : Ba sir Ah ma d, M. Faroo q Rana
è T he entir e in come o f a ll o f Dr M uhamm a d T ahir- ulQa dr i’s books, re cor de d a udio/v ideo ca ssettes & CD s
of h is lecture s/a ddre sse s, is de dicate d on his beh alf to
M inha j- ul-Qur an Intern ationa l.
P re se nte d By:
Far id-e- Millat Re sear ch In stit ute
366-M , Mo del T o wn, Lahor e, 54700, Pakistan.
www. m inh ajbook s. com
Publishe d by:
M inha j- ul-Qur an P ublicat ions
365-M , Mo del T o wn, Lahor e-54700, Pak istan.
(+92-42-5168514 , 5169111-3
Fax : +92-42-5168184
www. m inh aj. biz
E-m ail: [email protected]
Printe d in Pak istan by M inha j- ul-Qur an Printin g Pre ss.
Co ntents
P reface
1
Se ction 1
Imām M ahdī () is t he true Imām and is
from the family of F ātimah (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬
15
Se ction 2
The D ay of J udgment w ill not arrive before
the caliphate of Imām M ahdī ()
18
Se ction 3
Imām M ahdī () and Economic J ust ice
22
Section 4
Imām M ahdī () and the Saints
25
Se ction 5
Imām M ahdī () as A llāh’s Caliph
29
Section 6
Imām M ahdī () and Is lamic D ominance
32
Section 7
Economic Prosperity and F air Distribution of
Wealt h
37
Section 8
Imām M ahdī () will be w elcomed w ith
Open Arms
43
v
vi
T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )
Se ction 9
P rophet ‘Īs ā  and Imām M ahdī 
46
Se ction 10
O bedience of Imām M ahdī () w ill be
Compulsory
52
Se ction 11
Circumst ances Surrounding Imām M ahdī’s
A rrival
54
Se ction 12
Imam M ahdī () as t he Last Caliph
57
G loss ary
65
Bibliography
69
Index t o H adīth and Athar (A rabic)
75
Index t o H adīth and Athar (English)
79
G eneral Index
83
F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final
vi
Book\02-Contents (v-vi).doc

Preface
T oday is 18 Dh ul-h ijjah ,1 th e day wh en the Prophet ()
st aye d at Gh a dīr Kh um after h is ret urn from Ha jjat-ulwa dā‘ 2 to Me dina. Surro un de d by the Comp anion s (), he
de clare d while ra isin g the han d of ‘Alī a l-M urta dā () :
. ‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻤ‬‫ﻲ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ ﻓﹶﻌ‬‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻜﹸﻨﹾﺕﹸ ﻤ‬‫ ﻥ‬‫ﻤ‬
Wh oev e r ha s me a s his maste r ‘Alī is
h is maste r.
T his wa s the dec lar ation o f ‘ Alī’ s spirit ua l sove reignty
an d it s uncon ditiona l a cc eptance is bin din g on be liever s
till the Day of Judgem ent. It clear ly prov es that anyone
who den ie s ‘Alī’s spir itual sover eignty in fact denie s the
Prophet’ s sp ir itual sover eignty. T his most h um ble
fo llo wer of the Prophet ( ) fe lt that some peop le deny
this r ea lity partly o ut o f ignor anc e an d p artly o ut of
pr ejudice , wh ich is sp rea din g unne ce ssary ten sion an d
disun ity in the M uslim comm unity. Un der the
c irc umstan ce s I tho ught it nec e ssary to wr ite t wo
pamph let s on the issue of sover eignty an d lea der ship : one
title d a s Th e Ghad īr Dec la ration an d the othe r title d The
A wa ited Imām Mahd ī (). T he fo rmer is de sign e d to
1.
2.
t he t wel ft h m ont h i n t he Is l am i c cal endar, and the month of
t he pi l gri m age t o M akkah
t he l ast or farewell pi lgri m age of the Prophet M uham m ad
() t he year (10AH /632A D ) before he l eft for his eternal
hom e.
1
2
c lar ify the stat us of ‘Alī () a s the op ener of the sp ir itua l
sover eignty an d the latter is de sign e d to descr ibe the
st atus of Im ām M ah dī ( ), the se al of sp ir itua l
sover eignty. T he m ain p urpo se is to r emove the do ubts
that have gathere d aro un d the issue an d to m ake the
M uslim s a war e of the rea lity. T he sp ir itual sover eignty of
‘ Alī an d M ah dī (‫ )ﻋﻠﯿﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﻼم‬a re p rove d by the a uthentic
had īth- book s of Ah l- us- Sunn ah wa l- Jamā ‘ah, in the form
of contin uo us tr a dition s, (that is, the re is un interr upte d
ev iden ce to en dor se th e so un dne ss o f the tr a dition s). In
the f ir st p amphlet I h ave inc lude d 51 tra dition s wh ich a re
f ull a uthentic ate d an d ref eren ce d. T he rea son for this
n um be r is that this ye ar I h ave complete d 51 ye ars of my
lif e. T herefor e, in or de r to ga in ble ssin gs I hav e h um bly
use d th is r elat ionsh ip a s wa sīlah ( interme diation ) in the
pr esence of ‘Alī (), so th at this me a gre ef fort is
a cc epted. ( Āmīn)
In this p refa ce I want to c lar ify the thre e type s of
le ga cy ( inher itance ) han de d do wn by the Ho ly Prophet
( ):
i.
T he
sp irit ua l
inher itanc e
of
‘ un apparent
suc ce ssion’ (sp ir itual khilāfah ).
ii.
T he politic al inh eritan ce of ‘extern al ca liph ate.’
iii.
T he gen era l inher itance of ‘r eligio us ca liph ate.’
T he fir st form of inher itance wa s giv en to the
mem ber s of the Prophet’s fam ily .
T he secon d form of inh eritan ce wa s given to the
r ightly- guide d ca liph s.
T he thir d form of inhe ritanc e wa s giv en to other
Compan ion s an d the Succe ssor s ().
T he ‘ unapp arent succ e ssion’ is that fo unta inhe a d of
Prophet M uh amma d’ s suc ce ssion which not on ly
saf e guar de d sp irit ua l ach ievem ents an d hidden ble ssin gs
of I slam , but also intro duce d the Umm ah to sp ir itua l
sover eignty, sa intly r ank of qu tb an d refo rmation thro ugh
wh ich the Umm ah ben efite d sp ir itually.
T he ‘externa l c aliphate’ is that fo untainh ea d of
Prophet M uhamma d’s succ e ssion wh ich le d to the
.
.
.
Pr ef ace
3
pr actic al domin anc e of I slam a s we ll a s it s e sta blishment
a s a pra ctic al sy stem . T his le a d to gov ernan ce an d
st a bility of the Prophet’ s d īn. It p ave d the way for the
c reation of dif fer ent I slamic state s an d pr actically
introduce d the sha rī‘ah o f Prophet M uhamma d () a s a
wo rld sy stem.
T he ‘ gen era l c aliphate’ is the fo untainh ea d of Prophet
M uh amma d’ s succ e ssion wh ich promote d the I slam ic
tea chin gs an d prove d the importanc e o f r ighteo us dee ds in
the M uslim comm unity. It not on ly he lpe d in the
pr eservation of kno wle dge an d p iety amon g th e Ummah
but a lso in the spr ea d an d prop a gation of I slam ic mora lity.
T he three types of c aliphate m ay be summe d up a s:
i.
Suc c e ssion of sp ir itual sov ere ignty.
ii.
Ca liph ate of gov ernan ce.
iii.
Ca liph ate of guidan ce.
Sh āh Wa lī Allāh (‫ )ﺭ ﲪﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬, a gre at scho lar of the
In dian Subc ontinent, h as comm ente d on th is div ision of
Prophet’ s inh er itance in the follo win g wo r ds:
, ‫ﭘﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺙ ﺁﳓﻀﺮﺕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﻪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ‬, ‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺨﺎﺼﺘﻪ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻁﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻅ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬
‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻜﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ‬,‫ﺍﻹﺭﺸﺎﺩﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻴﺎﺕ‬,‫ﻭ ﺴﺎﺌﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺭﺓ‬
‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺯﺌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻭﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻘﻭﺍ ﺒﺈﺤﺴﺎﻥ ﻜﺄﻨﺱ ﻭ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻤﻥ‬
‫ ﻓﻬﺫﻩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺘﺏ ﻤﺘﻔﺭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻜﻤﺎل‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺨﺭﻴﻥ‬
. ‫ﺨﺎﺘﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺴل ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
P eople who ha ve rec eived th e P roph et’ s
inhe ritanc e a re o f three kind s: ‘Th e first
k ind is of tho se who rece iv ed wisdom, p ie ty
4
and inne r enlightenment from h im. Th e se
a re the membe rs o f his family and o the r
spe cific p ersona litie s. The se cond g roup is
o f those who rec eived th e inhe ritanc e o f
e xterna l enlightenment from him in the
form of v irtuou sne ss, and gu idance . Th e se
a re his sen io r Companion s, eg the fou r
ca liph s and the ten Companion s who
re ceived the great n e ws (of parad ise from
the P rophe t Muhammad ( )). The third
g roup is o f those who rec eived ind ividua l
b le ssing s from h im in the fo rm o f
kno wledg e and piety. Th ese a re the peop le
who we re ste eped in the v irtu e o f īh sān
( se lfle ssne ss), like Ana s and Abū Hu ray rah
(‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, and the peop le who came
late r.’ Th e th ree fo rms of inhe ritanc e o we
their
o rig in
to
th e
finality
of
me ssenge rship .1
It may be note d that this division is ba se d on
conv enience an d sp ec ia l stat us whe rea s e ach c ate gory of
inher itance share s th e qua litie s of other inher itance s of the
Prophet (). Ea ch c atego ry ha s, in som e sh ape or form,
a re lation sh ip with the other.
v In govern ance , Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq ( ) wa s the
imme diate dep uty of the Prophet ( ).
v In sp ir ituality an d sainthoo d ‘ Alī al- M urta dā () wa s
h is dir ectly appointe d dep uty.
v In guidanc e a ll o f his Compan ions an d Ca liph s ()
we re his imme diate dep utie s.
As a re sult, after the f ina lity of proph ethood, thr ee
hor izon s we re set up in or der to fa cilitate the eterna l
contin uity of the Proph et’s () ble ssin g:
i.
T he first hor izon is for the politic al inher itanc e of
the Prophet ( ).
1.
S hāh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yyah (2: 8).
Pr ef ace
ii.
5
T he secon d hor izon is for the spir itual inh eritan ce
of the Prophet () .
iii.
T he th ir d horizon is for the e duc ationa l an d
pr actic al inh eritan ce of the Prophet ( ).
· T he po litica l inh er itance of the Prophet () wa s
kno wn a s kh ilā fah rāsh idah (the r ightly- guide d
c aliphate) .
· T he sp ir itua l inh er itance of the Prophet () wa s
kno wn a s wilāyah ( spir itual sover eignty) an d imāmah
( sp irit ua l lea der ship) .
· T he e ducation al an d pr actica l inh er itance of the
Prophet () cam e to be kno wn a s guidanc e an d
hone sty.
T herefor e, the f ir st r ec ipient of po litica l inh eritan ce
wa s Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq ( ), the f ir st r ec ipient of
spirit ua l inh er itance wa s ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (), an d the f irst
r ecip ient s of e ducation al an d pra ctic al inher itanc e we re
the Comp anion s (). So all of th em wer e imme diate
c aliph s (h ea ds o f the ir p artic ular c ate gorie s). T her e is no
form of contr a dict ion or r iva lry bet ween the three .
T he se con d important po int to be noted is that the tr ue
st atus of the thr ee dif fer s with re gar ds to var io us issue s,
such a s:
1. ‘ Externa l c aliphate’ is the po lit ica l off ic e of Islam .
T he ‘ un appar ent ca liphate’ is exc lusiv ely a
spirit ua l off ice .
2. T h e ‘ externa l ca liph ate’ is an e le ctive an d
con sultative p roce ss.
T he ‘ unapp arent ca liph ate’ is an inher ent an d
se lect ive act.
3. T he ‘ externa l’ c aliph is e le cted by the p eople .
T he ‘ unapp arent’ ca liph is se lecte d by Go d.
4. T he po litica l c aliph is e lecte d.
T he spir itual ca liph is sele cte d.
5. T h is is the re ason that the fir st ca liph Abū Bakr a sSiddīq () wa s e le cte d on the ba sis o f ‘Um ar Fār ūq’ s
() p roposal an d the con sensus of the majo rity of the
p ublic . But the e le ction of the fir st Imām of sp ir itua l
6
sover eignty — ‘ Alī al- M urta dā () — re quir e d ne ither
any bo dy ’s propo sal nor a con sen sus.
6. Demo cracy wa s to be der ive d from the ca liph ate,
wh ich is why the Proph et ( ) did not anno unc e who
will be the c aliph after h im. Spir it ual le a der sh ip wa s
an act of a ssignm ent; there fore, the Proph et ( )
de clare d it in the va lley of Gha dīr Kh um.
7. T h e Prophet ( ) le ft the e le ction of th e c aliph to the
will of the peop le , but the spir it ual lea der ( walī) wa s
se lecte d by himself by the will o f Allāh.
8. Exte rna l ca liph ate is e sta blishe d to pe rfect the
wo rldly sy stem.
Sp ir itual lea der ship is e sta blishe d to bea utify it
with the he aven ly ch arm an d gra ce.
9. Ca liphate m ake s men just.
Sp ir itual lea de rsh ip m ake s them p erfe ct.
10. Ca liphate is conf ine d to the floor (e arth).
Sp ir itual le a der sh ip exten ds to the T hrone (of
Allāh).
11. Ca liphate is in effe ctive witho ut off ic ia lly tak in g
off ic e.
Sp ir itual lea der ship is ef fectiv e even without
takin g off ice .
12. T h is is p ro ba bly th e re ason why c aliphate wa s
entr uste d to the Ummah, an d
Sp ir itual lea der sh ip wa s entr uste d to the fam ily of
the Prophet ( ).
T herefor e, ther e is no e scap in g (room
for th e den ia l of ) political lea dersh ip
( khilāfah ; c aliphate) nor of sp ir itua l
sover eignty (wilāyah). T he dire ct c aliphate
of Abū Bakr as- Siddīq () wa s e sta blishe d
with the con sensus of the Comp anion s ()
an d is cate gor ica lly proven by history. T he
direct sp ir itual sov ere ignty of ‘Alī a lM urta dā () wa s anno unc e d by the Prophet
( ) himself an d is cate gor ica lly p roven
by
muta wātir ( un broken
cha in
of)
Pr ef ace
7
tra dition s. T he proof of the ca liph ate is the
con sensus of the Co mpanion s () an d the
proof of sp irit ua l sove re ignty ( wilāyah) is
the dec lar ation of the Prophet () . One
who denie s the ca liph ate in fa ct den ie s
h istory an d con sensus, an d on e who den ie s
the sp irit ua l sov ere ignty ( wilāyah) den ie s
the Prophet’ s dec la ration. T here fore, both
the ca liphate an d the sp ir itua l lea dersh ip
a re ine sc apa ble rea litie s. Wh at is ur gently
ne e de d is a c le ar un der stan din g of the
r eality of the t wo in stitut ions in or de r to
pr esent conform ity r ather than diff eren ce
( cla sh) bet we en the t wo .
It sho uld be un der stood that just a s the externa l
c aliphate starte d with the right ly- guide d ca liph s an d its
ble ssin gs wer e pa sse d on to the r ighteo us an d just r uler s,
sim ilar ly the unapp arent c aliphate ( sp irit ua l sover eignty)
st arte d with ‘Alī a l-M urta dā () an d it s ble ssin gs we re
pa sse d on to the me m ber s of the Prophet’ s fam ily an d
pe rfecte d sa ints of the Umm ah. By mean s of the
de claration — ‫ﻭﻻ ﻩ‬‫ ﻤ‬‫ ﻲ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ ﻓﹶﻌ‬‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻜﹸﻨﹾﺕﹸ ﻤ‬‫ﻥ‬‫ ( ﻤ‬who ever ha s m e a s his
ma ster ‘Alī is h is ma ster) — an d — ‫ ﻭﻟ ﻴﻜ ﻡ ﻤ ﻥ ﺒﻌ ﺩﻱ‬‫ ‘( ﻋﻠ ﻲ‬Alī
is yo ur sp ir itual le a der after me ) — the Prophet ( )
p ublic ly dec lar e d ‘ Alī () a s the op ener of sp ir itua l
sover eignty.
Sh āh Walī Allāh (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬in the chapter of
wilāyah say s:
‫ﻝ ﺍﹶﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﹸﻣﺖ ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻣﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺗﺢﹺ ﺍﹶ ﻭ‬.1
.‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬
In th is Ummah th e first pe rson to open
the doo r o f spiritua l sov e re ignty ( wilāy ah)
is ‘A lī a l- Murtadā (‫)ﻛﺮم اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ وﺟﮭﮫ‬.1
1.
8
‫ﺮ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﹶﻣﲑ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻻﺩ ﻛﺮﺍﻡ‬‫ ﻭ ﺳ‬.2
.‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
The sec re t of th e sp iritual sove reign ty
( wilāyah ) of the Lead e r (‘A lī ‫ﻛﺮم اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ‬
‫ )وﺟﮭﮫ‬wa s pa ssed down to h is ch ild ren.1
‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﻛﺴﻰ ﺍﹶﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻻ ﲞﺎﻧﺪﺍﻥ‬.3
.‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻬﻰ ﺍﹶﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‬
The re fo re, the re is no t a sing le sa int in
the Ummah who is no t d ire ctly or ind ire ctly
link ed to the family o f ‘A lī () ( to a tta in
spiritua l leade rship ).2
‫ﻝ‬‫ ﻭ ﺍﹶﺯ ﺍﹸﻣﺖ ﺁﳓﻀﺮﺕ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﹶ ﻭ‬.4
‫ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻗﺪﻡ‬,‫ﻛﺴﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
,‫ﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻨﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬
.‫ﻭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
The first pe rson in the P roph et’ s
Ummah who open ed the gate o f se lf-denia l
in ( the most supe rio r and po we rful catego ry
o f) spiritua l so ve re ign ty and who took the
first step on to this eleva ted spot is ‘Alī ( ‫ﻛﺮم‬
‫ )اﷲ و ﺟﮭﮫ‬. Tha t is why d ifferent o rde rs
( sa lā sil) of sp irituality re turn to h im.3
5. Sh āh W alī Allāh (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬write s:
“ No w who soever rec eiv e s wilāyah
( sp irit ua l sov ere ignty) from the Ho ly
Prophet M uh amma d ( ), it is e ither
r ece ive d thro ugh a re lation sh ip with ‘ Alī
1.
2.
3.
S hāh W al ī Al l āh, Hama‘āt (p. 60).
Pr ef ace
9
a l-M urtadā () or a r elation ship with the
Chief Help er ( Gh a wth- ul-A‘ zam) Jīlan ī
(‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬. No one c an gain wilāyah
( sp irit ua l sov ere ignty) by bypa ssin g this
pro ce ss.”1
It sho uld be note d that the relation ship with the Chief
Help er ( Gha wth- ul-A‘zam ) is in f act a chapte r an d a r ay of
the r elation ship with ‘ Alī al- M urta dā ( ).
Sh āh I sm ā‘īl Dih la wī h a s c lar if ie d this po int:
“ ‘Alī
al- M urta dā
() a lso
ha s
super ior ity in a sin gle dimen sion over Abū
Bakr a s- Siddīq () an d ‘ Umar Fār ūq ().
T his sup erior ity lie s, f ir stly, in the gr eater
n um be r of his fo llo wer s. Se con dly , all
c ate gorie s
of
wilāyah
( sp ir itua l
sover eignty) fro m his day till the en d of
tim e ar e only po ssible thro ugh h im. He ha s
a say in the k in gdom of the kin gs an d the
lea der ship of the le a der s an d this is not
h idden f rom those who ar e f amiliar with the
wo rld of an ge ls… Mo st sp ir itua l ch ain s a re
direct ly deriv e d from ‘Alī a l-M urta dā ().
So , on the Day o f Judgement, ‘Alī’s army
includin g follo wer s of h igh stat us an d great
r ep utation, will o utnum ber an d o utsh ine
other s to be a so urc e of won der fo r a ll the
spe ctators. ”2
‘ Spirit ua l sove re ignty’ ( wilā yah), within the Prophet
M uh amma d’ s () Umm ah, who se fo unta inhea d is ‘ Alī
a l-M urtadā (), is dire ctly sh are d by Fātim ah, Ha ssan an d
Husse in () an d then through them it wa s pa sse d do wn to
the t we lve Imām s ( spirit ua l lea de rs) , the la st lea der be in g
Im ām Mah dī ( ). Just a s ‘ Alī a l-M urta dā ( ) is the
1.
2.
S hāh W al ī Al l āh, Hama‘āt (p. 62).
S hāh Is m ā‘ ī l Di hl awī , Si r āt mus t aqī m (p. 67).
‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪open er of spir itual sove re ignty, Imām M ah dī ( ) is the‬‬
‫‪se al o f spir itual sov ere ignty.‬‬
‫‪T he wor ds of Sh aykh M uja ddid Alf T hānī Ahma d‬‬
‫‪) approp riately h igh light the‬رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ( ‪Sa rh an dī‬‬
‫‪po int:‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﺍﻫﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻘﺮﺏ ﻭﻻﻳﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻻﺀ ﻭ ﳒﺒﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﳘﲔ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﺬﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻓﻪ‪ ,‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﳘﲔ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻠﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻯ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﻨﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺋﻴﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺴﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﻮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻭﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻨﲔ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﻨﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﮔﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻼﺫ ﻭﻣﻠﺠﺎﺀ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺰﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﲤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﲝﻀﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻨﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻮﺽ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﳘﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ‬
‫‪‬ﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺍﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬
Pr ef ace
11
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﳘﭽﻨﲔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﲢﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﲞﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻣﻼﺫ ﻭ‬,‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﳒﺒﺎﻯ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺠﺎﺀ ﳘﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑ ﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻏﲑ ﺍﺯ‬
.‫ﳊﻮﻕ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
And the re is anothe r way clo se to
spiritua l sov ereign ty and th is is th e way o f
a ll ca tego rie s of sa ints o f all leve ls. The
pa th o f mysticism (ta sa wwuf) sp rings from
this path and it also in volv e s the sta tu s o f
se lf-d enia l. In te rmedia tion is p ro ven in this
p roc ess b ecau se ‘A lī al- Mu rtadā ( ) is the
founta inhead of from which the Sha ykh s o f
those on this path gain a ll their ble ssing s.
And th is grand office is re se rv ed for him.
On this pa th, th e fee t o f th e Ho ly P rophe t
( ) a re on ‘A lī’s head wh erea s Fā timah,
Ha ssan and Hu sse in () share this statu s
with him. I b elie ve that he enjo yed this
po sition ev en be fore his ph ysica l b irth, a s
he did a fte r it. Who soev e r ha s rec eived the
d ivin e ble ssing s and guidan ce on this pa th,
ha s rece iv ed it through h im, be cau se he is
c lo se st to th e last po in t on th is path and the
c entre of this spo t be long s to h im. And
when ‘A lī’s p eriod ended , the g rand office
wa s passed down to Ha ssan and Husse in
(‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﮭﻤ ﺎ‬. Th en it wa s passed do wn
to the twe lv e Imāms in th e co rre ct o rde r
one by on e, the la st of whom will b e Imām
Mahdī (). Who soe ve r re ce ived guidan ce
in their life and afte r the ir dea th, rec eived
it th rough th e se sa ints. The se Imāms a re
12
the sou rce of a ll b le ssing fo r e ven the h igh
rank ing sain ts ( such as qut ubs and n uja bā’
be cau se the y a re th e c entre of all sp iritua l
ac tivity ) and no one can survive without a
link with the h eadquarte rs.1
Sh aykh Ahma d Sarh an dī (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬be lieve s that
Im ām Mah dī ( ) will sh are spir it ual sove reignty
( wilāyah ) with ‘Alī a l-M urta dā ().
T he gist of the disc ussion is that the Proph et’s
de claration at Gha dīr Kh um p rove d forev er that ‘Alī’ s
spirit ua l sov ere ignty is in fact the Prophet M uh amma d’ s
spirit ua l sove re ignty. As the door of prophethoo d wa s
c lo se d after th e Ho ly Proph et () , Allāh () ha s op ene d
ne w aven ues for the contin uation of the Proph et’s
ble ssin gs till th e Day of Judgement. Som e were blesse d by
an extern al stat us wh ilst other s by an interna l status. T he
h idden aven ue is kno wn a s sp irit ua l sove reignty an d ‘ Alī
a l-M urtadā () wa s its f ir st Imām . T hen this cha in of
sover eignty wa s pa sse d do wn to the Prophet’ s fam ily an d
f ina lly to the t we lve Im āms. Beside s the t welv e Imām s
there ar e thousan ds of othe r pio us in div idua ls who
r each e d the stat us of sainthoo d. T hey h ave h eld high rank s
of sainthoo d ( such a s gha wth, qu tub) an d hav e enlightene d
the liv e s of million s of peop le thro ugh the intern al light of
wilāyah , takin g th em o ut of ignoran ce an d a stray . Yet all
of th em ga ine d th eir spir itual st atus f rom the sp ir itua l
sover eignty of ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (), be it directly or
in dir ectly. No one wa s se lf- suff icient an d in depen dent
from th e wilāyah of ‘ Alī a l-M urtadā ( ) an d th is cha in
will contin ue up to the Day o f Judgement until the
app ear ance of the la st Im ām ( sp irit ua l le a der ) an d the
c entre of sp ir itua l lea de rsh ip. He will be Imām
M uh amma d M ah dī ( ), the t we lfth Im ām an d the last
c aliph. In his pe rson , the exte rnal an d the un apparent
c aliphate s wh ich r an par alle l to e ach other will come
to gether. He will be the sp ir itual a s well a s the po litica l
1.
S haykh Ahm ad S arhandī , Makt ūbāt (9: 173#123).
Pr ef ace
13
inher itor, an d h e will be the la st pe rson to ho ld the office s
of kh ilā fah an d wilāyah . Anyone who denies I mām Mah dī
( ) will deny both the externa l an d unappa rent form s of
I slam.
T his will be the climax of the expo sure an d disc losure
of the Prophet M uhamm a d’ s ble ssin g. T his is due to the
f act that, he will be nam e d M uhamm a d an d he will also
r esem ble the Ho ly Prophet ( ) in mora l exce llenc e. So
the wor ld sho uld kno w that this Imām is the r ec ipient of
both the externa l an d intern al inher itanc e o f the Proph et’s
ble ssin gs. T hat is why th e Prophet ( ) said, “ Anyone
who den ie s M ah dī will be a disbeliev er. ”
At that time, he will be th e fo c us of all saints on earth,
an d, bein g the lea der o f Proph et M uh amma d’ s Umm ah,
proph et ‘Īsā ( ) will offer his pr ayer beh in d him an d in
this way , he will anno unc e h is lea der sh ip to the who le
wo rld.
So we sho uld r ea lize that ‘ Alī al-M urta dā ( ) an d
M ah dī ( ) o f the e arth an d h eaven s — the father an d the
son — ar e both Allāh’ s fr ien ds an d the Proph et’s
inher itors. It is therefor e comp ulsory on ev ery be liever to
a ckno wle dge their exc eptiona l status.
M ay Allāh () giv e us the a bility to ga in ble ssin gs
from the se fo unta inhe a ds of wilāyah . (Ām īn! with the
interme diation o f the L ea de r of the Proph ets ( )).
M uhammad Ta hir- ul-Qad ri
On e of the servant s of Proph et’s ( ) Fa mily
15
Secti on 1
Imām Mahdī ( ) is the true Imām and is
from the family of Fātimah (‫) رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺏ ﻴﻘﻭل‬.1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﺫﻜﺭ‬:‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﻘﻭل‬
. ‫ ﻫﻭ ﺤﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬,‫ ﻨﻌﻡ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Sa ‘īd ibn M usayya b r elate s that he h ear d Umm
Sa lamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬say: I h ear d the M essen ger of Allāh
( ) m ention Mah dī. He said: y es, M ah dī is th e T ruth
(that is, his appear anc e is tr ue an d immin ent) an d h e will
be from the fam ily o f Fātimah .”1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻨﺱ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺎﻟﻙ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.2
‫ﻟﹶﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻁﻠﺏ ﺴﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ ﻨﺤﻥ ﻭ‬: ‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﺃﻨﺎ ﻭﺤﻤﺯﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺠﻌﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻴﻥ‬: ‫ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺠﻨﺔ‬
. ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Ana s ibn Mā lik () na rrate s: I he ar d the M essen ger
of Allāh () say : we, the childr en of ‘Abd- ul-M uttalib,
will be the ch ief s of the p eople of Par a dise , that is,
my se lf, Ham zah, ‘ Alī, Ja ‘far, Ha ssan , Husse in an d
M ah dī. ”2
‫ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.3
. ‫ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
1.
2.
Related by Hākim in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8671), while Dhahabī
kept silent about it.
Ibn Mājah narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:455
(#4087); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (3:211 # 4940); Mizzī, Tuhfat-ulashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (1:86 # 195); and Hindī in Kanz-ul‘ummāl (12:97 # 34162).
F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
16
“ Umm Salamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬say s that Allāh’ s
M essen ger () ment ione d Mah dī ( an d h e sa id:) he will
be from the children of Fātim ah.”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺎﺌﺸﺔ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.4
‫ ﻫﻭ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻨﺘﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺘﻠﺕ ﺃﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
. ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺤﻲ‬
“ ‘Ā’ ish ah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬re late s that the Prophet 
sa id: M ah dī will be f rom my children who will f ight (to
e sta blish) my sunnah a s I fo ught a ccor din g to the div ine
r evelation. ”2
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺃﺒﺎ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﺤﺒﻴﺏ‬.5
‫ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬:‫ ﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬,‫ﺒﻴﻨﻜﻡ ﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﺩﻥ‬
‫ ﻓﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺱ ﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ‬.‫ ﻴﺩﻭﻡ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ﻫﺭﻗل‬
: ‫ ﻥ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ؟ ﻗﺎل‬‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ! ﻤ‬:‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻭﺭﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺨﻴﻼﻥ‬
,‫ﻟﺩ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻜﺄﻥ ﻭﺠﻬﻪ ﻜﻭﻜﺏ ﺩﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺨﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ‬‫ﻤﻥ ﻭ‬
, ‫ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺀﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻌﻭﺍﻴﺘﺎ ﻥ ﻜﺄﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺭﺠﺎل ﺒﻨﻲ ﺇﺴﺭﺍﺌﻴل‬,‫ﺨﺎل ﺃﺴﻭﺩ‬
.‫ ﻴﺴﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻭﺯ ﻭﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻤﺩﺍﺌﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬,‫ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﻋﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ‬
“ Sulaymān ibn Ha bīb say s that he he ar d Abū Um āmah
() narr ate: T he Me ssen ge r of Allāh  said: ther e will
be pe ac e bet ween yo u an d Ro me fo ur time s an d the fo urth
tim e the lea de r of the Roman s will be a pe rson belon gin g
to the ch ildr en of Her ac lius. T his ‘p ea ce’ will la st seven
contin uo us y ear s. A man from ‘ Abd a l-Qays, M usta wr id
1.
2.
Hākim related it in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8672); and Suyūtī in alHāwī lil-fatāwā (2:74).
Ibn Hammād narrat ed it in al-Fitan (1:371#1092); and Suyūtī
copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:74).
17
ibn Khay lān, a ske d the Me ssen ger o f Allāh  : who
will be the Imām of the M uslim s at that time ? He ( )
r eplie d: that pe rson will be from (my) ch ildr en an d he will
be forty ye ar s o ld. His f ac e will be br ight like a star an d
there will be a black bea uty spot on his r ight che ek, an d
he will be dre sse d in t wo cotton go wn s an d it will seem a s
tho ugh h e is exa ctly like one of the Ch ildren of I sra el. He
will r ule for t en ye ar s, discov er tre asure s fro m ben eath the
e arth an d con quer the c itie s r ule d by the po lytheists. ”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.6
. ‫ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ‬:‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn M as‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬h a s r elated it
from the Proph et  : he sa id: T he n ame of Mah dī will
be M uhamm a d.”2
1.
2.
Tabarānī narrated it in al-Mu‘jam-ul -kabīr (8:101#7495), Musnadush-shāmiyyīn (2:410#1600); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id
(7:318,319).
Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatawā (2:73).
18
Secti on 2
The Day of Judgment will not arrive
be fore the caliphate of Imām M ahdī ()
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.7
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺫﻫﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
“ Related by ‘Abdullāh ibn Ma s‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that
the Me ssen ger o f Allāh’  sa id: the wor ld will not
se ize to exist until someon e from my fam ily be come s the
k in g of Ara bia whose nam e will be the same a s my n ame
( ie M uhamm a d).”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.8
.‫ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻭﺍﻁ ﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻭﺃﺨﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬:‫ﻗﺎل ﻋﺎﺼﻡ‬
‫ل ﺍﷲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻭﻡ‬‫ ﻟﻁﻭ‬, ‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬
. ‫ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻠﻲ‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn M as‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬narr ate s that the
Prophet  said: one of my ch ildren will be the caliph
an d his n ame will be the same as min e.
1.
Tirmidhī narrated it in al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters of fitan
(turmoils) 4:85 (#2230); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, b.of Mahdī, 4:87
(#4282); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (1:376, 377, 430, 448);
Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (13:284 # 5954; 15:237 # 6824); Ibn Abī
Shaybah, al-Musannaf (15:198); Bazzār, al-Musnad (5:204
#1803); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:488 # 8364); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:131, 133-137 # 10208, 10213-10230), alMu‘jam-us-saghīr (2:290 # 1181); Abū Nu‘aym, Hilyat-ul-awliyā’
wa tabaqāt-ul-asfiyā’ (5:75); Khatīb Baghdādī, Tārīkh Baghdad
(4:388); and Mizzī in Tuhfat-ul-ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (7:23 #
9208).
19
“ ‘Āsim sa id: Abū Sā lih r elate d to us: Na rrate d by Abū
Hurayr ah () : even if only one day rem ain s befor e the
en d of the world, Allāh will len gthen the day to the extent
that that per son ( ie Mah dī) be come s the ca liph .”1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.9
. ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
“ Umm Sa lam ah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬say s: I hea r d the
M essen ger of Allāh  say: M ah dī will be from my
f amily an d he will be f rom the ch ildren of Fātimāh .”2
‫ ﻜﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻨﻀﺭﺓ‬.10
‫ ﻴﻭﺸﻙ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻴﺠﺒﻰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻡ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻭﻻ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﺃ ﺴﻜﺕ ﻫﻨﻴﺔ‬. ‫ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻡ‬: ‫ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﻙ؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ‬.‫ﻤﺩﻯ‬
‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
.‫ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ‬
‫ ﺃﺘﺭﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ ﻨﻀﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺀ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
. ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻴﺯ؟ ﻓﻘﺎﻻ‬
“ Abū Na dr ah narr ates that we we re with Jā bir ibn
‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬when h e sa id: T hat time is ne ar
wh en ne ither dinar s nor gra in will be bro ught to the
nativ e s of Syr ia. We a ske d: who will impose this
r estr iction? Jā bir () sa id: T he Rom ans. T hen he kept
1.
2.
Tirmidhī graded it Hassan (fair) sahīh (sound) in al-Jāmi‘-ussahīh, (chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:85 (#2231); Ibn Mājah, asSunan, b. of jihād (holy war) 3:354 (#2779); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh
(13:283 #5953); and Mizzī in Tuhfat-ul-ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf
(9:428 #12810).
Abū Dāwūd related it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4284); Ibn
Mājah, as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:454 (#4086); Hindī,
Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (12:264#38662); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ulmanthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).
20
quiet for a wh ile an d sa id: Allāh ’s Me ssen ger  ha s
sa id that a Ca liph (ie M ah dī) will appea r in th e la st day s
of my Ummah an d h e will give we alth in va st quantitie s
witho ut keep in g a reco r d of it.
“ Jur ayrī, the sub-narr ator, sa id: I a ske d Abū Na drah
an d Abū ‘ Alā ’: in yo ur op inion is ‘Um ar ibn ‘Abd- ul‘ Az īz, the Ca liph m entione d in the had īth ? T hey rep lie d:
No (this Caliph will be someon e othe r than ‘ Uma r ibn
‘ Abd- ul- ‘Az īz ).”1
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.11
‫ ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺩﻭﺍﻨﺎ‬
. ‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻭﺍﻨﺎ‬
“ Nar rate d by Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () that the
M essen ger of Allāh  said: T he Day of Judgm ent will
not com e until the e arth is fille d with tyranny, explo itation
an d r e bellion. Later, a pe rson (M ah dī) will be born from
amon g my ch ildr en who will f ill the ea rth with justice an d
e quity. (It me ans that the Day of Judgm ent will not come
be fore the appe aran ce of th e Ca liph Mah dī) as it wa s f ille d
with tyranny an d re bellion .”2
1.
2.
Muslim narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah
(turmoils and the conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2234 (67/2913);
and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330, 331).
Ahmad bin Hambal narrated it briefly in al-Musnad (3:38,
333).
Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of
Bukhārī and Muslim in his al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8669), while
Dhahabī confirmed it.
Ahmad narrated it in al-Musnad (3:36); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh
(15:236 # 6823); and Abū Ya‘lā in al-Musnad (2:274 #987).
Haythamī transmitted it in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:132 # 1880)
with a sound chain of transmission.
21
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.12
, ‫ ﺃﺸﻡ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ‬,‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ‬, ‫ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺇﺼﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻴﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺒﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﻘﺩ‬,‫ﻭﺒﺴﻁ ﻴﺴﺎﺭﻩ‬
.‫ﺜﻼﺜﺔ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh  sa id: Mah dī will be from my fam ily, his no se
will be po inte d an d high an d h is fo rehe a d will be bright
an d sh inin g. He will f ill the e arth with justice an d e quity,
just as ( be fore it) it ha d been fille d with tyranny an d
tran sgre ssion. T he Prophet ( ) said, “ he will live for ,”
then h e stretch e d o ut h is left (h an d), t wo fo ref in ger s an d
th um b of his r ight han d an d jo ine d the thre e (mean in g
M ah dī will live for eight ye ar s).”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.13
‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻟﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ ﺭﺠﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
“ ‘Alī () ha s r elate d it from the Prophet () : he
 sa id: If on ly on e day wa s to rem ain for th is wor ld to
st ay in tact ( Allāh will len gthen th e day an d) a p er son,
( calle d Mah dī) from my fam ily , will be born who will f ill
the wo rld with justice an d e quity just a s ( be fore h im) it
ha d been fille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion.”2
1.
2.
Haythamī copied it in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:313, 314) also,
and declared the men of Ahmad and Abū Ya‘lā thiqah
(trustworthy).
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8670).
Abū Dāwūd related it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:87 (#4283); Ibn
Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37648); Hindī, Kanz-ul-
22
Secti on 3
Imām Mahdī ( ) and Economic Justice
‫ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﻬﺔ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ‬,‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﻲ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﻴﻤﻠﻙ‬,‫ ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬:‫ﺍﻷﻨﻑ‬
.‫ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
Allāh  sa id: Mah dī will be from m e (ie from my
f amily), his fa ce will be br ight an d shin in g an d his no se
will be po inte d an d h igh. He will f ill the e arth with justice
an d fa irne ss just a s before him it wa s f ille d with tyranny
an d opp re ssion. ( Me anin g that befor e the ca liphate of
M ah dī, ty ranny an d exp lo itation sha ll re ign suprem e in the
wo rld an d the re will not be the slightest trac e of justice
an d e quity.)”1
‫ ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ‬,‫ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬,‫ﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ‬
.‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ‬
Allāh  sa id: (Ne ar to the en d of tim e) the earth will
be f ille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion an d a pe rson will be
1.
‘ummāl (14:267 # 38676); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fittafsīr bil-ma‘thūr (6:58).
Ahmad bin Hambal related it with a little bit difference of
words in al-Musnad (1:99).
Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4285);
Khatīb Tabrīzī, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171
(#5454); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).
23
born from amon g my ch ildren, an d he will r ule as Caliph
for sev en or n ine ye ar s. (Durin g h is ca liph ate) he will f ill
the earth with justice an d fa irne ss just a s it wa s prev io usly
f ille d with tyranny an d injustice. ”1
‫ )ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.16
‫ ﺤﺘﻰ( ﻻ ﻴﺠﺩ‬,‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺒﻼﺀ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﺭﺠ ﻼ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﺠﺄ ﻴﻠﺘﺠﺊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻠﻡ‬
, ‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺼﺒﻪ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ﺒﺫﺭﻫﺎ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺨﺭﺠﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺘﺘﻤﻨﻰ‬,‫ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻊ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ‬
. ‫ﺍﻷﺤﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍﺕ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﺒﺄﻫل ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻴﺭﻩ‬
“ Abū Sa‘ īd Kh udr ī ( ) say s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh  mention e d a gr eat te st that will f ace this
Ummah. A time will come when oppre ssion will be at
such a pe ak that there will not be any ref uge for any
M uslim. T hen Allāh will r aise someon e from amon gst my
ch ildren who will ref ill the earth with justic e an d fa irne ss
just a s it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d oppr e ssion befor e it.
All those livin g in the h eaven s an d e arth will be ple a se d
with h im. T he e arth will pro duc e as m uch a s possible, an d
Allāh will po ur do wn torrent ial ra in f rom the sky. Mah dī
will liv e in this e ra (of pro sper ity, e quity an d just ice) for
sev en, e ight or n ine y ear s. Pro spe rity will be on such a
h igh that the peop le at the tim e will wish that on ly if tho se
1.
Related by Ahmad bin Hambal in al-Musnad (3:70).
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8674), while Dhahabī kept quiet
about it.
24
who ha d pa sse d befo re them an d exp erienc e d m isery an d
oppr ession were alive .”1
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.17
‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻟ ﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠ ﻙ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﺍﺴﻡ‬, ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﻭ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻸ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﺒﻲ‬
,‫ ﻭﻴﺠﻌل ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺒﺎﻟﺴﻭﻴﺔ‬
. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬, ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬
“ Nar rate d by ‘Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that
M essen ger o f Allāh  sa id: if th ere wa s on ly on e night
left for this world to stay in ta ct, Allāh will len gthen it
until a mem ber of my fam ily becom es the r uler who se
nam e will be the same as my n ame an d the nam e of his
f ather will be the sam e a s the nam e of my f ather. He will
f ill the world with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s f ille d
with tyranny an d explo itation. He will distribute thin gs
e qually amon g the peop le an d Allāh will also fill the
he arts o f the Umm ah with content. He will r ule for seven
or n ine ye ars. T hen a fter the ca liph ate of Mah dī, ther e will
be a total en d to goo dne ss ( an d v irtue).”2
1.
2.
Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:465 # 8438); Azdī, al-Jāmi‘
(11:371); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:359 # 1041); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1049 # 563, 564); and Khatīb Tabrīzī in
Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171 (#5457).
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:133, 135 # 10216, 10224); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1055 # 572); Haythamī, Mawārid-uzzam’ān (6:129 # 1877); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:269 #
38683).
Haythamī also narrated it through Abū Hurayarah () in
Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:128 # 1876).
Suyūtī narrated it with a di fference of words at another place
in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).
25
Section 4
Imām Mahdī ( ) and the Saints
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.18
‫ ﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻟﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜ ﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﺼﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬,‫ﻜﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻫل ﺒﺩﺭ‬
“ Umm Sa lamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬n arrate s that M essen ger
of Allāh  sa id: P eople exact ly e qual in n um be r to the
Compan ion s of Ba dr (ie 313) will tak e the oath of
a lle gianc e on the han d of a pe rson from my Ummah
(M ah dī) bet ween the Black Ston e an d the Station of
I br āhīm (maqām Ib rāhīm). Later on, the saint s o f I ra q an d
the abdā l ( Substit ute s) of Syria will also com e to him (to
give the o ath of a lle gianc e).”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬.19
‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬,‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﺎﺭﺒﺎ‬,‫ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
, ‫ﺨﺭﺠﻭﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ ﻓﻴ‬, ‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﻤﻜﺔ‬, ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻤﻜﺔ‬
, ‫ﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺒﻌﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬‫ ﻭﻴ‬,‫ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺫﻟ ﻙ‬,‫ﺨﺴﻑ ﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﺒﻴﺩﺍﺀ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺭﺠل‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ‬,‫ﺃﺘﺎﻩ ﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺼﺎﺌﺏ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻕ‬
, ‫ ﻓﻴﻅﻬﺭﻭ ﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ‬, ‫ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ ﺃﺨﻭﺍﻟﻪ ﻜﻠﺏ ﻓﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺜﺎ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‬, ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤ ﻥ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺸﻬﺩ ﻏﻨﻴﻤﺔ ﻜﻠﺏ‬, ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺒﻌﺙ ﻜﻠﺏ‬
1.
Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:431 # 8328); Ibn Abī
Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:460 # 37223); Tabarānī, al-Mu‘jam-ulkabīr (23:296, 390 # 656, 930); Manāwī, Fayd-ul-qadīr (6:277);
Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (4:271, 272 # 38696); and Suyūtī in adDurr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (5:241).
26
‫ ﻭﻴﻠﻘﻲ‬, ‫ﻭﻴﻌﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺒﺴﻨﺔ ﻨﺒﻴﻬﻡ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺘﻭﻓﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺒﺙ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻡ ﺒﺠﺭﺍﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
. ‫ﻭﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻤﻭﻥ‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺎل‬.‫ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ ﻭ ﻗﺎل ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺃﺒﻭ ﺩﺍﻭﺩ‬
.‫ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ‬
“ Nar rate d by Umm Salamah ( ‫) ر ﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬, the wife of
the Prophet ( ), who says that the Me ssen ger of Allāh
( ) sa id: at the de ath o f a Caliph there will be a
differ enc e of op inion ( bet we en the M uslim s of Me dina
ove r the e le ction of the n e w Ca liph). One pe rson (that is,
M ah dī, r ea lisin g that the peop le might elect h im as the
c aliph) will leav e Me dina for Makk ah. Some of the
r esident s of Makk ah ( who will reco gn iz e him a s Mah dī)
will com e to him, an d br in g him o ut (of h is hom e) a ga inst
h is will; they will tak e the o ath (o f ca liph ate) on h is han d
bet ween the Bla ck Stone an d the Station of I brāh īm
(maqām Ibrāh īm). (Wh en the n e ws of his ca liph ate will
spre a d), an army will set o ut fro m Syria to wa ge war on
h im ( but befor e rea chin g him) it will be p ushe d do wn into
the (tree le ss) gro un d at Bay dā ’ bet ween M akkah an d
M e din a. T he abdā l ( Substit utes) of Sy ria an d the Sa ints of
Ir a q will take the oath o f caliphate on his han d. L ater, a
Quray shī (that is, Sufyān ī) per son, whose materna l
r elat ive s will be from the Ka lb tr ibe, will sen d an a rme d
for ce a ga in st them. T hey will p reva il over the inva din g
a rmy an d this will be the Battle o f Ka lb. One who ( doe s
not tak e p art in the Battle of Ka lb) ha s noth in g to do with
the booty will be in lo ss. (After this con que st) the Caliph
M āh dī will gen ero usly donate wea lth amon g the peop le
an d make th em fo llo w th e sunnah of the ir Prophet .
I slam will be f ully e sta blishe d on ea rth (ie Islam will be
dom inant an d a ccepte d all over the world) . Mah dī will
r ema in ( as Ca liph ) for sev en y ear s, then h e will die, an d
the M uslim s will atten d his f uner al.
27
“ Abū Dā wūd said: som e tran sm itted from Hishām
“ nine year s” an d som e “ seven y ear s. ”1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.20
,‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻲ ﻤﻜﺔ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﺨﺭﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺸﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻬﺯ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺠﻴﺵ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﺼﺎﺌﺏ‬,‫ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﻭﺍ ﺒﺎﻟﺒﻴﺩﺍﺀ ﺨﺴﻑ ﺒﻬﻡ‬,‫ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﺃﺨﻭﺍﻟﻪ ﻜﻠﺏ ﻓﻴﺠﻬﺯ‬, ‫ ﻭﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺭﺠل ﺒﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬
, ‫ ﻓﺫﻟﻙ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻜﻠﺏ‬,‫ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺯﻤﻬﻡ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺠﻴﺵ‬
‫ ﻭﻴﻘﺴﻡ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻭﺯ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺌﺏ ﻤ ﻥ ﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﻤﺔ ﻜﻠﺏ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺒﺫﻟﻙ ﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ ﻭﻴﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻡ ﺒﺠﺭﺍﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬,‫ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬
.‫ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
“ Umm Sala mah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬re late s: she hear d the
M essen ger of Allāh’ s  say: ther e will be diff eren ce
of op inion over the de ath of the c aliph (ie diff eren ce on
who sho uld be appointe d a s the next Ca liph . On see in g
this) a p er son from th e tr ibe o f Hā shim (fe arin g he may be
se lecte d to take the bur den o f the Caliphate) will le ave for
M akkah from Me dina. Som e p eople will come an d t ake
h im o ut of his ho use a lthough h e will r e sist it. T hen they
1.
Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (6:316); ‘Abd-ur-Razzāq, alMusannaf (11:371 # 20769); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musamaf (7:460
# 37219); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (12:369 # 6940); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (23:390 # 931); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah filfitan (5:1083, 1084 # 595); Haythamī, Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:133
# 1881); Khatīb Tabrīzī, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils)
3:171 (#5456); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:265 # 38668); Suyūtī,
ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58); and Ibn ‘Asākir
in Tārīkh Dimashq al-kabīr (1:215, 216).
28
will take the oath (of ca liphate ) on his h an d bet we en the
Black Ston e an d the Station of I brāh īm (maqām Ib rāhīm).
( On h ear in g the n e ws of their alle gianc e) an a rmy will set
o ut to war ds them from Syr ia but it will be cr ushe d into the
gro un d a s it r each es Bay dā’ ( a p la in bet we en Makk ah an d
M e din a). After this, the saints of Ir a q an d the abdā l
( Subst itute s) of Sy ria will ca ll on him . T hen a ( Sufyān ī)
pe rson will come from Sy ria, h is m aterna l r elative s
be lon gin g to th e Ka lb tribe, h e will de spatch his army to
wa ge war on him. Allāh will def eat them, r e sultin g in
them fa cin g a cata strophe. T his is the Battle o f Ka lb. So
anyon e who ( doe s not take part in the Battle of Kalb an d
a s a re sult) doe s not share in the booty, will be in lo ss.
T hen the ca liph Mah dī will discover tr ea sure s an d
distr ibute them genero usly ( amon g the people). I slam will
be f ully e sta blishe d on e arth. Peop le will live ( in this state
of pro sper ity an d comfo rt) for seven or n ine ye ar s (that is,
peop le will live in pe ace an d co mfort until the death of
M āh dī) .”1
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.21
. ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ ﻴﺼﻠﺤﻪ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ‬:‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
“ ‘Alī () re late s that the Me ssen ger o f Allāh 
sa id: Mah dī will be from my fam ily . Allāh will t urn h im
ove rnight into a r ighteo us per son (that is, thro ugh His
guidanc e, He will ra ise h im to the high e st leve ls of
sa inthood) .”2
1.
2.
Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (2:90 # 1175), alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (23:390 # 930); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, b. of
Mahdī, 4:89 (#4287); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:158, 159 # 6757);
Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:431 # 8328); Azdī, al-Jāmi‘ (11:371); and
Haythamī in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:133 # 1881).
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:315) that Tabarānī
related it in al-Awsat and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth.
Ibn Mājah rel ated this Hassan (fair) hadīth in as-Sunan, b. of fitan
(turmoils) 4:454 (#4085); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (1:84);
Bazzār, al-Musnad (2:243 # 644); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (1:359 #
29
Secti on 5
Imām Mahdī ( ) as Allāh’s Caliph
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺜﻭﺒﺎﻥ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.22
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ‬,‫ ﻴﻘﺘﺘل ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜﻨﺯﻜﻡ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
,‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻁﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺭﻕ‬, ‫ﻴﺼﻴﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ‬
. ‫ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻠﻭﻨﻜﻡ ﻗﺘﻼ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻘﺘﻠﻪ ﻗﻭﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻴﺘﻤﻭﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻩ ﻭﻟﻭ ﺤﺒﻭﺍ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬, ‫ﺜﻡ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻻ ﺃﺤﻔﻅﻪ‬
. ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ‬
“ T hawbān () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh
 sa id: T hre e per son s will wa ge war nea r yo ur
trea sur e. All thr ee will be son s of the ca liph an d yet this
trea sur e will not be tran sf erre d to anyone of them . T hen
black f la gs will appea r fro m the ea st an d they will wa ge
wa r on yo u with such inten sity that no nat ion ha d wa ge d
wa r with such a ggre ssion befor e.
“ (T ha wbān ( ) say s:) then the M e ssen ger of Allāh
 sa id som ethin g ( wh ich I co uld not rem em ber .) T hen
the Prophet () said: when yo u p eople see h im, yo u
sho uld take the oath of a lle gian ce on his han d ev en if yo u
hav e to come dr a ggin g on sno w. In de e d h e will be the
Ca liph of Allāh, Mah dī.”1
1.
465); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37644); Daylamī,
al-Firdaws (4:222# 6669); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fittafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).
Ibn Mājah narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:453
(#4084) with a sound chain of transmission and its men are
trustworthy.
Ahmad bin Hambal related it in al-Musnad (5:277); Ru’yānī,
al-Musnad (1:417#637); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan
(5:1032 # 548); Daylamī, al-Firdaws, (2:323#3740); Kinānī,
Misbāh-uz-zujājah (4:204, 205 # 2440); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl
(14:263 # 38658); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-
30
Ne cessary
Clarifi cation : I bn Ha jar ‘Asqalān ī
comm ents in Fa th-ul-bā rī (13 :78, 79) wh ile quotin g this
tra dition: If the trea sur e mention e d in this tra dition is the
one ref erre d to by Abū Huray rah ( ) in this tra dit ion:
‫ ﻴﻭﺸﻙ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺴﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻨﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻫﺏ‬
“ T he Me ssen ger of Allāh () sa id: T he t ime
is n ear when the r iver E uph rate s (hav in g drie d up)
will reve al a tre asure of gold. ”1
T hen th is tra dition c le arly in dicate s that the se ev ents
will o cc ur at the time of M ah dī’s appe aran ce.
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺤﺫﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.23
, ‫ ﻟﻭﻨﻪ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺒﻲ‬, ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﻭﻟﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
, ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺨﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﺨﺎل ﻜﺄﻨﻪ ﻜﻭﻜﺏ ﺩﺭﻱ‬, ‫ﻭﺠﺴﻤﻪ ﺠﺴﻡ ﺇ ﺴﺭﺍﺌﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺨ ﻼﻓﺘﻪ ﺃﻫل‬,‫ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﻻﹰ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍﹰ‬
. ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟ ﺠﻭ‬
1.
ma’thūr (6:58); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:515,
516).
Bukhārī and Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:463, 464 # 8432), while
Hākim also narrated it with some different words at another
place in al-Mustadrak (4:502#8531).
Bukhārī narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 6:2605
(#6702); Muslim, as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah
(turmoils and the conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2219 (#30/2894);
Tirmidhī, al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters of sifat-ul-jannah (the
description of Paradise) 4:326 (#2569); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan,
book of malāhim, 4:98 (#4313); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad
(5:139, 140); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:87,88#6693,6694);
Baghawī, Sharh-us-sunnah (15:34#4239); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl
(14:203#38398); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr
(6:61); and Ibn ‘Asākir in Tārīkh Dimashq al-kabīr (7:234).
31
“ Nar rate d by Hudh ayfah () that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh  said: M ah dī will be from my fam ily . His
comp lex ion will be of an Ara b an d a physic al str ucture of
the children of Israe l. T her e will be a bea uty spot on his
r ight che ek. His app ear ance will be simila r to a lumino us
st ar. He will fill the e arth with justic e just a s it wa s f ille d
( before h im) with injustice. T hose in the earth an d the
he aven s will be plea se d with h is ca liph ate. T he bir ds in
the sk ie s will also be plea se d.”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.24
‫ ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ ﺒﻐﻴﺭ‬,‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬: ‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
.‫ﻋﺩﺩ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udrī () r elates fro m the Prophet 
that he sa id: Near to the en d of tim e, a Ca liph (Mah dī)
will com e who will give the ir due r ights to the peop le
witho ut re cor din g it (ie witho ut k eepin g a r ecor d of who
ha s rec eiv e d wh at).”2
1.
2.
Suyūtī related it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:66); Daylamī, al-Firdaws
(4:221#6667); and ‘Ajlawnī in Kashf-ul-khifā’ wa muzīl-ul-ilbās
(2:381#2661).
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Ibn Abī Shaybah,
al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37640); Daylamī, al-Firdaws (5:501 #
8918); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:357 # 1032); and Suyūtī in adDurr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).
32
Section 6
Imām Mahdī () and Islamic Dominance
‫ ﻜﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﻠﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻴل‬.25
‫ ﻓﻘﺎل ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻓﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺠل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺫﺍﻙ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻘﺩ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‬,‫ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬:‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻤ ﻊ ﺍﷲ ﺘﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻟﻪ ﻗﻭﻤﺎ‬, ‫ ﺍﷲ ! ﺍﷲ! ﻗﺘل‬: ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎل ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬,‫ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺴﺘﻭﺤﺸﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬, ‫ ﻴﺅﻟﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ‬, ‫ﻗﺯﻉ ﻜ ﻘﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ‬
‫ ﻴﺩﺨل ﻓﻴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ ﺒﺩﺭ ﻟﻡ‬, ‫ﺃﺤﺩ ﻭﻻ ﻴﻔﺭﺤﻭﻥ ﺒﺄﺤﺩ‬
‫ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ‬, ‫ﻴﺴﺒﻘﻬﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﻻ ﻴﺩﺭﻜﻬﻡ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﻭﻥ‬
. ‫ﻁﺎﻟﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ ﺠﺎﻭﺯﻭﺍ ﻤﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺭ‬
: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬. ‫ ﻨﻌﻡ‬:‫ ﺃﺘﺭﻴﺩﻩ؟ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل ﺍﺒﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻴل‬
‫ ﻭﺍﷲ! ﻻ‬,‫ ﻻ ﺠﺭﻡ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬.‫ﺇﻨﻪ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺒﺘﻴﻥ‬
. ‫ ﻓﻤﺎﺕ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻤﻜﺔ ﺤﺭﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﷲ ﺘﻌﺎﻟﻰ‬.‫ﺃﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺃﻤﻭﺕ‬
“ Abū T ufay l r elates from M uh amma d ibn Hanaf iyyah
that he said: We we re sitting in th e comp any of ‘Alī ()
that a p er son a ske d him a bo ut M ah dī. ‘ Alī ()
(p lea santly) sa id: go a way. T hen , co untin g seven on his
han d, he sa id: M ah dī will appe ar in the la st day s an d (the
dom inanc e of non-re ligio us for ce s will be at such a leve l
that) anyone m entionin g the n ame of Allāh will be kille d.
( At the tim e o f Mah dī’ s appe aran ce) Allāh will gather a
pa rty aro un d h im, just as the separ ate piec es of c lo ud a re
joine d to gether an d Allāh will c reate love (an d unity)
amon g th em. T hey will n either fe ar anyone nor will they
unne ce ssar ily favo ur anyone (m ean in g that they de al with
ev ery bo dy e qua lly). T he peop le who will gather ro un d the
c aliph will n um ber the Companion s who h a d tak en part in
the battle of Ba dr (that is, 313). T h is party will have a
33
spe cia l super ior ity which was not po sse sse d by anyone
be fore them no r will anyon e po sse ss it after them. T he
n um be r o f the p eople in this party will be the same a s the
Compan ion s of T ā lūt who ha d cro sse d th e ( Jor dan) cana l
in the comp any of T ā lūt.
“ Abū T uf ayl say s that M uhamm a d ibn Hanaf iyyah
a sk e d the a udienc e: Do yo u inten d to jo in th is party? I
sa id: ye s. He sa id, po intin g to war d the t wo p illars (of
Ka‘ bah ): T he appe aran ce o f c aliph Mah dī will tak e p la ce
bet ween them. At this, Abū T uf ayl said: By Go d! I shall
not leave them durin g my whole life . (T he n arr ator says) :
a ccor din gly , the death of Abū T uf ayl took p la ce in
M akkah. ”1
‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻼﻟﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.26
– ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺒﻌﺜﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻟﺤﻕ! ﺇﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل ﻟﻔﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ‬,‫ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻴﻥ – ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺭﺠﺎ ﻭﻤﺭﺠﺎ ﻭﺘﻅﺎﻫﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ ﻭﺘﻘﻁﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒل ﻭﺃﻏﺎﺭ ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ‬
‫ ﺒﻌﺙ‬, ‫ ﻓ ﻼ ﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻴﺭﺤﻡ ﺼﻐﻴﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺼﻐﻴﺭ ﻴ ﺅﻗﺭ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤ ﻥ ﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺤﺼﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻼﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻭﺒﺎ‬
, ‫ﻏﻠﻔﺎ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ‬
. ‫ﻭﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬
“ ‘Alī a l-Hilālī ( ) n arrate s that the Prophet  sa id
to Fātim ah (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬: I swear by the One who ha s sent
me with the T ruth! Sure ly, the Mah dī of this Um mah will
be from amon g (the ch ildr en o f) the se t wo, that is, Ha ssan
an d Hussein . At a t ime when the wor ld will be subje ct to
ch ao s an d tur moil, roa ds will be c ut off an d peop le will
attack one another, no e lder ly will sho w lov e to the
1.
Bukhārī and Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:554 # 8659), while
34
yo un ge r an d no yo un gster will re spe ct the elderly , then
Allāh will sen d a pe rson from amon g the se t wo who will
con quer the fort s of disbelief an d open clo se d h earts. He
will e stablish I sla m in th e last days of the Ummah a s I
hav e e sta blishe d it in the ear ly day s (o f this Umm ah). He
will fill th e earth with justic e just a s it was form erly f ille d
with tyranny an d per se c ution. ”1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.27
‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
,‫ ﻴﻨﺯل ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻭل ﺒﺴﻨﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻜﺘﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ ﻴﻌﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬
.‫ ﻭﻴﻨﺯل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ‬,‫ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
“ Abū Sa ‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) h as nar rate d: I hea r d the
M essen ger of Allāh  say: A per son will appea r from
my fam ily who will pre ach my sunnah. Allāh will po ur
do wn ra in for h im from the sk ie s an d the earth will
disclo se (an d thro w o ut) its tr ea sure s for h im. T he earth
will be f ille d with justice an d f airn ess be ca use of him just
a s it wa s f ille d be fore h an d with tyranny an d per se c ution.
He will r ule th is Umm ah fo r sev en ye ar s an d he will
de scen d at the Ho ly Ho use ( Bayt- ul- M uqa ddas) .”2
‫ ﺤﺩﺜﻨﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﺒﻭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.28
‫ ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ‬: ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺴﻡ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
1.
2.
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:66,67); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (3:57, 58 # 2675), al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (7:276,
277 # 6536); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (9:165).
Suyutī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:62); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-awsat (2:47# 1079); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uzzawā’id (7:317).
35
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻀﺭﺒﻬﻡ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺭﺠﻌﻭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
. ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‬
‫ ﻭﻜﻡ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ؟‬: ‫ﻗﻠﺕ‬
. ‫ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﻭﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
“ Abū Hur ayrah () ha s na rrate d: My be love d Abū a lQā sim  sa id to me : T he Day of Judgement will not
com e until a p er son appe ar s from my fam ily who will
con front the peop le until they t urn to the tr uth. I said:
Ho w lon g will he r ule for ? He said: Fiv e an d t wo
(y ear s). ”1
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.29
‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬
. ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ! ﻟﻴﻌﻭﺩﻥ‬:‫ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
“ Nar rate d by Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that
M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: T here will be a c aliph in
my Umm ah who will genero usly distribute wea lth without
ke epin g a re cor d of it. An d I swear by the One who
contro ls my life! Certa inly th at the dom inanc e (of I slam)
1.
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:62); Abū Ya‘lā, alMusnad (12:19 # 6665); and ‘Asqalānī in al-Matālib-ul-‘āliyah
(4:343 #4554).
Haythamī says in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:315) that Abū Ya‘lā
narrated it and Abū Zur‘ah decl ared the sub-narrator, Marjā bin
Rijā’, trustworthy, while Ibn Mu‘īn weakened him, and its other
men are trustworthy.
36
will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ec aptur e it s lo st glo ry an d
r etriev e it s status dur in g h is re ign). ”1
1.
about it.
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that B azzār had
related it, and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth.
Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:362 # 1055); Suyūtī,
ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:56); and B ayhaqī in
Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330,331).
Muslim related it with di fferent words in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan
wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and conditions of the Last Hour)
4:2234 (#67/2913); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:317); Hindī,
Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38659); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah
wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).
37
Section 7
Economic Pros perity and Fair
Distribution of We alth
‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.30
‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺴﻘﻴﻪ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺙ ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻨﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ ﻭﺘﻜﺜﺭ‬
. ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺸﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻨﻴﺎ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () ha s narr ate d that the
M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: Mah dī will be bo rn dur in g
the la st day s of my Ummah . Allāh will po ur do wn h eavy
r ain durin g his ca liphate an d the e arth will gro w it s
pro duce in a bun dance , an d h e will distr ibute thin gs
e qually amon g the peop le. Dur in g his reign there will be
p lenty of cattle an d th e Ummah will be he ld in great
e stee m. (After becom in g the caliph) he will liv e for seven
or eight y ear s.”1
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.31
‫ ﺃﺒﺸﺭﻜﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻭﺯﻻﺯل‬
, ‫ ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬, ‫ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬
. ‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﻴﻤﻸ‬, ‫ ﺒﺎﻟﺴﻭﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬:‫ ﻤﺎ ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ ؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ﻓﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ ﺭﺠل‬
‫ﺍﷲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻏﻨﻰ ﻭﻴﺴﻌﻬﻡ‬
1.
Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) in al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8673),
while Dhahabī confirmed it.
Hindī transmitted it in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:273 # 38700); and
Albānī in Silsilat-ul-ahādīth-is-sahīhah (2:336 # 711).
38
‫ ﻤﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺠﺔ ؟‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻋﺩﻟﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺄﻤﺭ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ ﺍﺌﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻓﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺇﻻ ﺭﺠل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ‬
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺄﻤﺭﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻌﻁﻴﻨﻲ ﻤﺎﻻ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘل ﻟﻪ‬.‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ ﻜﻨﺕ ﺃﺠﺸﻊ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬. ‫ﺃﺤﺙ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺠﺭﻩ ﻭﺃﺒﺭﺯﻩ ﻨﺩﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺭﺩﻩ ﻓ ﻼ ﻴﻘﺒل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻨﻔﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺠﺯ ﻋﻨﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻭﺴﻌﻬﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺫﻟ ﻙ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ ﺇﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺸﻴﺎ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﻨﺎﻩ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ﻤﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺃﻭ‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﺵ ﺒﻌﺩﻩ‬,‫ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩﻩ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () ha s narr ate d that the
M essen ger o f Allāh ( ) sa id: I am givin g yo u the goo d
ne ws of the co min g of Mah dī who will be sent do wn at a
tim e wh en my Ummah will fa ll prey to disp utes an d chao s.
He will f ill the earth with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it
wa s fille d ( befor e him) with oppre ssion an d per se c ution.
T hose in the e arth an d h eaven s will be ple a se d with h im.
He will distribute thin gs e qua lly amon g the peop le ( ie he
will not discrim inate a gain st anyon e). Allāh ( durin g his
c aliphate) will fill the hea rts o f my Umm ah with
gen ero sity. He will prov ide justic e to a ll ( witho ut any
discrim inat ion or pref eren ce). He will ask h is anno unc er
to anno unc e that if anyone re quir e d anythin g (they sho uld
com e to Mah dī. On he ar in g this anno un cement) no one
from amon g the M uslim s ex cept on e p er son will stan d up.
M ah dī will a sk h im to go to the tre asur er an d tell h im that
M ah dī h as o r der e d yo u to give me som e goo ds. (T he man
will go to the tr ea surer ), the tre a sure will say to him : take
a s m uch a s yo u want. He will take (a s m uch a s he wishe s)
an d will come o ut of th e trea sury . He will, at that moment,
be a sh ame d (of his act) an d ( will say to him se lf) , am I the
gr ee die st per son in M uhamma d’s Ummah, or he will say
to h im se lf that wh ich is eno ugh for other s is not eno ugh
for me . ( Fe elin g guilty of his act) he will want to ret urn
39
the goo ds but it will not be tak en back . He will be told
that, onc e we have given som ethin g we do not tak e it
ba ck. So Mah dī will live for sev en, eight o r nin e y ear s
with this justice an d fa irne ss an d distribution of we alth.
T hen after h is ( death) ther e will be no goo dne ss
( comforta ble lif e) for the liv in g to en joy.”1
‫ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.32
‫ ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬, ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﺍﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
. ‫ ﻭﻟﻴﻤﻸﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
“ Abū Huray rah () h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of
Allāh ( ) sa id wh ile m entionin g Mah dī: At min im um,
the duration of the ca liph ate of M ah dī will be sev en ye ar s.
It c an a lso be e ight o r nin e year s. He will fill the earth
with justic e an d f airn e ss just as it wa s f ille d with tyranny
an d oppre ssion befor e it. ”2
‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
the M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: T here will be a caliph
in my Um mah who will genero usly distribute wealth
witho ut k eep in g a r ecor d of it. An d I swe ar by the One
1.
2.
Ahmad bin Hambal relat ed it in al-Musnad (3:37, 52); and Suyūtī
in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:57).
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:313,314) that
Tirmidhī had narrated it briefly, while Ahmad copied it through his
chain of transmission, and Abū Ya‘lā also narrated it briefly and
the men of Ahmad and Abū Ya‘lā are trustworthy.
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that Bazzār had
narrated it, and his men are trustworthy.
40
who controls my life! Certa inly , the dom inan ce (of I slam)
will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ec aptur e it s lo st glo ry an d
r etriev e it s status dur in g h is re ign). ”1
‫ ﺃ ﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.34
‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬, ‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟ ﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
, ‫ ﻴﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
, ‫ﻴﺭﺴل ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ‬
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬, ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬
.‫ﺨﺫﻩ‬
“ Abū Hurayr ah () ha s relate d that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh ( ) sa id: ther e will be Mah dī in my Ummah . If
(the dur ation of his caliphate is a) short (per io d) then it
will be seven y ear s, other wise, it will be e ight or n ine
ye ar s. T he pro spe rity of my Umm ah will be at such a h igh,
the lik es of which not exper ien ce d by it in the pa st. Ra in
will po ur do wn from the sky ( a s nee de d), the earth will
gro w a s m uch crop a s po ssible an d there will be no
shorta ge of we alth. A p er son will stan d an d say: O Mah dī!
Give me somethin g. M ah dī will say him : tak e it yo ur se lf
(fro m the trea sury ac cor din g to yo ur de sire s). ”2
1
.
2.
about it.
wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).
Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (6:193 # 5402).
41
‫ ﺃ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.35
‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬, ‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﺘﺅﺘﻰ ﺃﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬, ‫ ﻓﺘﻨﻌﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﻁ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
, ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬,‫ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬,‫ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ‬
. ‫ ﺨﺫ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udrī ( ) h a s re late d that the M essen ger
of Allāh () said: T here will be Mah dī in my Ummah
who will be th e c aliph for at lea st seven year s, other wise
for n ine y ear s. My Um mah will be so pro spero us in his
pe rio d that it wo uld not have exper ien ce d such p rosp erity
be fore it. T he ea rth will gro w every form of crop an d ho ld
ba ck nothin g. Durin g this p erio d goo ds will be in such a
h igh quantity as a h eap of gr ain on th e thre sh in g f loor.
So meone will stan d up an d say: O Mah dī! Give me
somethin g. He will say : T ake (a s m uch yo u like ).”1
‫ ﺨﺸﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.36
: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ ﻓﺴﺄﻟﻨﺎ ﻨﺒﻲ ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬,‫ﺒﻌﺩ ﻨﺒﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺩﺙ‬
— ‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻲﺀ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬.‫ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬: ‫ ﻭﻤﺎ ﺫﺍﻙ؟ ﻗﺎل‬: ‫ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ‬: ‫ﺯﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻙ — ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬. ‫ ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬, ‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ﺭﺠل‬
. ‫ﺜﻭﺒﻪ ﻤﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻁﺎﻉ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﻤﻠﻪ‬
1.
narrated it in al-Awsat and his men are trustworthy.
Ibn Mājah narrat ed this Hassan (fai r) hadīth in as-Sunan, b. of
fitan (turmoils) 4:453 (#4083); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf
(7:512, 513 # 37638); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8675); Dānī,
as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1035, 1036 # 550); and Ibn Kathīr
in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (10:37).
42
“ Abū Sa‘ īd Kh udrī () narr ates: W e a sk e d the Prophet
( ) a bo ut happen in gs a fter h im. We a ske d him : What
will h appen after yo u? He sa id: T here will be Mah dī in my
Ummah who will r ule for fiv e, o r seven or n ine , (the
na rrator is do ubtful a bo ut the corr ect per io d). I a ske d:
wh at is meant by this figur e? He sa id: (this f igure m ean s)
ye ar s. He said: (his p erio d will be a pe rio d of ble ssin g an d
pro sper ity.) A p er son will com e over to him an d a sk him :
O M ah dī! Give m e someth in g, give me som ethin g. So
M ah dī will giv e h im a s m any goo ds a s h e will be a ble to
c arry. ”1
1.
Tirmidhī related this Hassan (fai r) hadīth in al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh,
chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:86 (#2232); Ahmad bin Hambal, alMusnad (3:21, 22); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:262 # 38654); and
Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (10:37).
43
Section 8
Imām Mahdī ( ) will be welcomed with
Open Arms
‫ ﺤﺩﺜﻨﻲ ﻓ ﻼﻥ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻤﺠﺎﻫﺩ‬
.37
‫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻘﺘل‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺘﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻜﻴﺔ ﻏﻀﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻓﺯﻓﻭﻩ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺘﺯﻑ‬,‫ ﻓﺄﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺠﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺭﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺘﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ‬, ‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻨﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺘﻤﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻁﺭﻫﺎ‬
. ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﻴﺘﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﺘﻨﻌﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﻁ‬
“ (T he famo us tab i‘ ī ( Suc ce ssor)) M ujāh id h as na rrate d
that a Comp anion sa id: (T he ca liph) M ah dī will appe ar
a fter the m ur der of ‘Naf s Zak iyyah’ . When ‘ Naf s
Z akiyy ah’ is m ur der e d, those in the heav en s an d the earth
will be an gry with the m ur derer s. Later, the p eople will
com e to Mah dī an d br in g him ( with gr eat pomp an d sho w)
a s the br ide is carr ie d to her groom on we ddin g night. He
will fill th e e arth with e quity an d justice . ( Durin g his
c aliphate) the ea rth will gro w it s crop s as the sk ie s po ur
do wn p lenty o f rain . Dur in g h is r ule my Ummah will be
ble sse d with so many favo ur s that it ha s nev er been
ble sse d before. ”1
Ne ce ssary Clarification: A m an kno wn as Naf s
Z akiyy ah wa s M uhamma d ibn ‘ Abdullāh ibn
Husse in ibn ‘ Alī ibn Abī T ālib who r evolte d
a gain st Abbasid c aliph M an sūr in 145 AH an d wa s
ma rtyre d. T he tra dit ion do es not r efer to h im. He re
Naf s Z akiyy ah stan ds for some other sa int who
will come befor e Imām Mah dī.
1.
Related by Ibn Abī Shaybah in al-Musannaf (7:514 # 37653).
44
‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭ ﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.38
‫ ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
, ‫ ﻴﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
, ‫ﻴﺭﺴل ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ‬
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺍﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬, ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬
.‫ﺨﺫﻩ‬
Allāh  said: ther e will be Mah dī in my Ummah who
will r ule fo r sev en y ear s if the pe rio d is short, other wise
for eight or nine yea rs. Dur in g M ah dī’ s p er io d, my
Ummah will be so p rosp ero us that it will not h ave
exp erienc e d such pro sper ity before it. T he sky will po ur
do wn tor rential rain an d the ea rth will y ield it s entire
pro duce. Goo ds will be ly in g like a he ap of gra in s on the
thre shin g f loor. One man will stan d up an d say: O Mah dī:
give m e somethin g. So he will say: t ake ( a s m uch a s yo u
like ).”1
‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﺃﻤﻨﺎ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.39
‫ ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ‬,‫ ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻴﺭﻨﺎ؟ ﻓﻘﺎل‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﻨﻘﺫﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻘﺫﻭﺍ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻟﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻟﻑ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺼﺒﺤﻭ ﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬
. ‫ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﺒﺤﻭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﻬﻡ‬
Narr ated by ‘ Alī () , he sa id: I sa id (to the Prophet
( )) : O M e ssen ger of Allāh (‫ !)ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠ ﯿﻚ و ﺳﻠﻢ‬W ill
1.
Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (6:193 # 5402).
narrated it in al-Awsat and his men are trustworthy.
45
M ah dī be from us, the fam ily of M uh amma d or from
other s? He said: no, but h e will be from amon g us, Allāh
will re-e sta blish I slam thro ugh h im as he did so ( in the
be ginnin g) through us. T he se peop le will be re sc ue d from
m ischief thro ugh us (Mah dī) a s they h ave been save d from
po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur mean s (M ah dī) Allāh will
c reate lov e in their he arts after the h atre d of m isch ief a s
He cre ate d love in the ir hea rts after the hatre d of
po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur me ans peop le will be come
brother ly amon gst e ach othe r after th e r iva lry of t urmo ils
a s they have done so in I slam after the riv alry of
po lytheism." 1
1.
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-awsat (1:136 # 157); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:370,
371 # 1089, 1090); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:316,
317).
46
Secti on 9
Prophet ‘Īs ā  and Imām M ahdī 
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.40
,‫ ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺘﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺯل ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻜﻡ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ ﻤﻨﻜﻡ‬
Allāh   said: what will be the state (o f yo ur joy ) at
the time wh en ‘ Īsā ibn Mary am will descen d (from the
he aven s) an d yo ur Imām will be f rom amon g yo u.”1
Ex planation: It me ans that ‘Ī sā ( ), at the t ime
of descent, will o ffer h is pray er s in con gr e gation
but he himself will not be the Imām but a mem ber
of the Um mah, that is, c aliph M ah dī. Acco r din gly,
I bn Ha jar ‘Asqalānī with refe renc e to Abū a lHa ssan Āburrī’ s Manāq ib a sh-Shāfi‘ ī wr ite s: the re
a re contin uo us tr a dition s in its support an d ‘Ī sā
 will offe r one praye r beh in d c aliph M ah dī.2
‫ ﺃﺨﺒﺭﻨﻲ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺒﻴﺭ؛ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺴﻤﻊ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺠﺭﻴﺞ‬
.41
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬:‫ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﻁﺎﺌﻔﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‬: ‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
1.
2.
Bukhārī related it in as-Sahīh, b. of ambiyā’ (prophets) 3:1272
(#3265); Muslim, as-Sahīh, b. of īmān (faith) 1:136 (#155); Ibn
Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:213#6802); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad
(2:336); Abd-ur-Razzāq, al-Musannaf (11:400#20841); Ibn
Mundah, al-Īmān (1:516 # 415, 416); Abū ‘Awānah, al-Musnad
(1:99#315); Baghawī, Sharh-us -sunnah (15:82#4277); ‘Asqalānī,
Fath-ul-bārī (6:491), al-Isābah fī tamyīz-is-sahābah (4:766),
Taghlīq-ut-ta‘līq (4:40); Qurtubī, al-Jāmi‘ li-ahkām-il-Qur’ān
(4:101; 16:106); Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr-ul-Qur’ān al-‘azīm (1:578); and
Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’ thūr (2:242).
‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (6:493, 494).
47
‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻴﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻤﺔ‬
, ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺒﻌﻀﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺃﻤﺭﺍﺀ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬. ‫ ﺘﻌﺎل ! ﺼل ﻟﻨﺎ‬:‫ﺃﻤﻴﺭﻫﻡ‬
.‫ﺘﻜﺭﻤﺔ ﺍﷲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬
“ Nar rate d by I bn Jurayh : Abū Z ubayr r eporte d to me :
He he ar d Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬say in g: I
he ar d the M e ssen ger of Allāh ( ) sayin g: A section of
my peop le will not cea se f ightin g for the T ruth
suc ce ssf ully till the Day of Re surr ection. He said: ‘Īsā ibn
M aryam wo uld then de sc en d an d the le a der of the
M uslim s will say : come an d le a d us in pray er, but he will
say : “ No, som e amon gst yo u are le a der s over other s. T his
is th e hono ur from Allāh for this n ation” (ie proph et ‘Ī sā
( ) will de cline the off er of le a din g the pr ayer due to the
h igh status given by Allāh to this Umm ah).”1
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
.42
‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺨﻔﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ‬: ‫— ﻭﺫﻜﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل — ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻴﺎ ﺃﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ! ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻨﻌﻜﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺨﺭﺠﻭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺫﺍﺏ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺭ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻡ ﺒﻌﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ‬, ‫ ﻓﻴﻨﻁﻠﻘﻭﻥ‬, ‫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺭﺠل ﺠﻨﻲ‬: ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺒﻴﺙ؟ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫ ﻟﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬:‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﷲ! ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﻓﺘﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺓ‬,‫ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺢ ﺨﺭﺠﻭﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻓﻠﻴﺼل ﺒﻜﻡ‬,‫ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ‬
. ‫ﻓﺤﻴﻥ ﻴﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺫﺍﺏ ﻴﻨﻤﺎﺙ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻨﻤﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬
1.
Muslim narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of īmān (faith) 1:137 (#156);
Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:345,384); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh
(15:231,232#6819); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (4:59#2078); Ibn
Mundah, al-Īmān (1:517#418); Ibn Jārūd, al-Muntaqā (1:257
#1031); Abū ‘Awānah, al-Musnad (1:99 # 317); and Bayhaqī in
as-Sunan-al-kubrā (9:180).
48
“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬narr ates that the
M essen ger of Allāh () sa id: wh en I slam (ie the state of
the Ummah) becom e s weak, Da jjā l will appea r — an d
a fter givin g details a bo ut Da jjāl — h e sa id: After some
tim e, ‘Ī sā ibn Ma ryam will de scen d (from the heav en) an d
in the mo rnin g (that is, at pre - da wn ) h e will c all o ut: O
peop le! What is stoppin g yo u f rom f ightin g with th is evil
pr etender (Dajjā l)? Peop le will say: h e appea rs to be a
supern atur al cr eation (jinn), but a s they will move for war d
they will see ‘Ī sā  . T hen it will be time for pr ayer, so
their lea der will say: O Allāh’s Sp irit: come fo r war d (an d
lea d the pray er). He will say : “ Your I mām sho uld lea d
yo u” (an d at that time the Im ām will be M ah dī) . Wh en the
peop le will f inish the ir Da wn p rayer , they will le ave
( un der the lea der ship of ‘Ī sā ) to f ight Dajjā l. When
‘Ī sā will se e the L iar (Dajjā l), he ( ie Dajjā l, o ut of fe ar)
will start me ltin g a s sa lt melt s in water.”1
‫ ﻓﻘﺎﻟﺕ‬, ‫ ﻤﺭﻓﻭﻋﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.43
‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﻓﺄﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺃﻡ ﺸﺭﻴﻙ ﺒﻨﺕ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻡ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻗﻠﻴل ﻭﺠﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ‬:‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ؟ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ ﻗﺩ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﺫ ﻨﺯل‬,‫ﺭﺠل ﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫ ﻓﺭﺠ ﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻤﺎﻡ ﻴﻨﻜﺹ ﻴﻤﺸﻲ‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻀﻊ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻴﺩﻩ ﺒﻴﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻘﻬﻘﺭﻱ ﻟﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﺎﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ‬, ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻙ ﺃﻗﻴﻤﺕ‬,‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ! ﻓﺼل‬:‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ﻜﺘﻔﻴﻪ‬
. ‫ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ‬
1.
Ahmad bin Hambal related it in al-Musnad (3:367,368); Haythamī,
Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:343,344); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:325,
326#38819); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bilma’thūr (2:242,243).
Hākim gradid it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:530#8613).
49
“ Abū Umāmah Bāhilī () ha s re late d (a lon g
tra dition) from the Me ssen ge r o f Allāh  in which a
f ema le Compan ion Umm Shar īk bint ‘ Abī a l-‘ Akar ( ‫رﺿﻲ‬
‫ )اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬said: O M essen ger o f Allāh (‫!)ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠﯿ ﻚ وآﻟﻚ وﺳﻠﻢ‬
Wher e will the Ara bs be at that time, ( why will the Ara bs
not come o ut in support of the Ummah )? T he M essen ger
of Allāh  said: the Ara bs will be in sma ll n um ber,
an d mo st o f these will be in the Sacr e d Ho use an d the ir
Im ām will be a high ly p io us p er son (n ame d Mah dī). When
their Im ām will co me for war d for Da wn pr ayer, at that
tim e ‘Ī sā will de sc en d (f rom the heav en). T he Imām will
r etreat an d give way to h im so that ‘Ī sā can lea d people in
the pray er. ‘Ī sā p la cin g h is h an d bet we en the Imām’ s
sho ulder s will say : step for war d an d le a d the pray er
be ca use the iqāmah was sa id fo r yo u. T hen the ir Imām
(M ah dī) will lea d the pray er. ”1
:‫ ﻤﺭﻓﻭﻋﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺹ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.44
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻟﻪ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬,‫ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺭ‬
‫ ﺇﻨﻜﻡ ﻤﻌﺸﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺃﻤﺭﺍﺀ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﷲ ! ﻓﺼل ﺒﻨﺎ‬,‫ﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻓﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ‬.‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﻨﺕ ﻓﺼل ﺒﻨﺎ‬,‫ﺒﻌﻀﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬
“ Uthmān ibn Abī a l-‘ Ās () dir ectly n arrate s that the
M essen ger of Allāh  sa id: prophet ‘Ī sā ibn Ma ryam
will de scen d (from th e h eaven ) at the t ime of Da wn pray er
( fajr) an d the lea de r of the peop le will re quest him : O
Allāh’ s Sp ir it! ( Com e for war d an d) lea d us in pr ayer . ‘Ī sā
will say : “ yo u are the peop le of M uh amma d’ s Umm ah.
So me amon gst yo u ar e le a der s ov er other s. So move
1.
Related by Ibn Mājah in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:446,447
(#4077).
50
for war d an d lea d us in praye r.” T he lea der of the M uslim s
will come for war d an d lea d the p rayer .”1
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭﻭ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.45
.‫ ﻭﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘ Amr () says that ‘Ī sā  will
de scen d after M ah dī an d will o ffer (on e) pr ayer beh in d
h im.”2
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.46
.‫ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
Allāh  sa id: ther e will be a per son from this Ummah
an d ‘Ī sā ibn M aryam (‫ ) ﻋﻠ ﯿﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﻼم‬will pr ay beh in d h im.”3
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺤﺫﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.47
‫ ﻴﻠﺘﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ! ﺼل ﺒﺎﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻜﺄﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻁﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺸﻌﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺨﻠﻑ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ‬.‫ ﺇﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻴﻤﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﻭﺓ ﻟﻙ‬:‫ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬
. ‫ﻭﻟﺩﻱ‬
“ Hudhayf ah ( ) r elate s th at the M essen ger o f Allāh
 sa id: When M ah dī will appe ar ‘Ī sā ibn M aryam will
de scen d an d it will seem a s tho ugh water is droppin g from
1.
2.
3.
Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:478#8473); Ahmad bin
Hambal, al-Musnad (4:217); and Tabarānī in al-Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr
(9:60#8392).
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:342,343) that Ahmad
and Tabarānī had related it and the men of Ahmad were those of
sound hadīth.
Ibn Hammād narrat ed it in al-Fitan (1:373#1103); and Suyūtī in
al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:78).
Ibn Qayyim transmitted it in al-Manār-ul-munīf (1:147 # 337); and
Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64).
51
h is h air. At that tim e Mah dī, a ddr e ssin g him , will say :
p lea se come for war d an d le a d the peop le in pray er.
Prophet ‘ Īsā will say : the iqāmah wa s sa id for yo u;
there fore, yo u will lea d the pr ayer. Ac cor din gly, ‘ Īsā will
off er this pr ayer beh in d a m an from my f amily (M ah dī).”1
‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬, ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺴﻴﺭﻴﻥ‬
.48
.‫ﻴﺅﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
“ I bn Sīrīn r elates that (Imām ) Mah dī will be from this
Ummah an d will le a d ‘ Īsā ibn Mary am (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬in
pr ayer. ”2
1.
2.
Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:81).
Ibn Abī Shaybah narrated it in al-Musannaf (7:513#37649); and
Ibn Hammād in al-Fitan (1:373#1107).
52
Secti on 10
Obedience of Imām Mahdī ( ) will be
Compulsory
‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺸﻬﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺤﻭﺸﺏ‬
.49
:‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺭﻡ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻓ ﻲ‬, ‫ ﻓﺎﺴﻤﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺃﻁﻴﻌﻭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﻻ! ﺇﻥ ﺼﻔﻭﺓ ﺍﷲ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ‬
. ‫ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ‬
“ Shah r ibn Ha wsha b () n arrate s that the M essen ger
of Allāh () said: In (the month of) M uh arra m, an
anno un cer will ca ll o ut from the heav en: be ware ! Sure ly,
( be inform e d that) such a pe rson h as be en cho sen by
Allāh, so listen to h im an d o bey him dur in g the ye ar of
upro ar an d turmo il.”1
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
.50
‫ ﻭﻤﻥ‬,‫ ﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‬
M essen ger of Allāh () said: whoeve r den ie s (the
com in g of ) Dajjā l, h as sure ly comm itted disbe lief, an d
who ever denie s (the com in g of) Mah dī ha s ( also)
comm itte d disbelief. ”2
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.51
‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬,‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃ ﺴﻪ ﻋﻤﺎﻤﺔ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻓﺎﺘﺒﻌﻭﻩ‬,‫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ‬
1.
2.
Ibn Hammād related it in al-Fitan (1:226,338#630,980); and
Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:76).
Related by Suyutī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:83).
53
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘Uma r (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬n arr ates that the
M essen ger of Allāh () said: Mah dī will come an d the re
will be a t ur ban on h is hea d. T here will be an anno unc er
who will pro claim : this is M ah dī, Allāh’ s c aliph, so fo llo w
an d o bey h im. ”1
1.
Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī,
Musnad ash-shāmiyyīn (2:71#937); and Dayl amī in al-Firdaws
(5:510#8920).
54
Secti on 11
Circumstances Surrounding Imām
M ahdī’s Arrival
‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻥ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻗﺎل‬
.52
‫ ﻓﻴﻭﻀﻊ‬, ‫ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺘﺎﺒﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺤﻴﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺒﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺤﻤل‬
‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﺩﻴﻪ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻨﻅﺭﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﻭﺩ ﺃﺴﻠﻤﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
.‫ﻤﻨﻬﻡ‬
“ Related by Sulaymān ibn ‘Ī sā (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬: I wa s
informe d that the Ark of the Covenant will eme r ge from
T a bar iyyah Sea thro ugh the efforts of Imām Mah dī. It will
be p lac e d befor e him at the Sa cre d Ho use. When the Je ws
will se e this (Ark) , a ll of them except a f e w will em bra ce
I slam. ”1
‫ ﻴﻁﻠﻊ ﻨﺠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻜﻌﺏ‬
.53
. ‫ ﻟﻪ ﺫﻨﺏ ﻴﻀﺊ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Ka‘ b () h a s nar rate d: A comet with a br ight tail will
app ear from th e e a st befor e the appe aran ce of Imām
M ah dī. ”2
‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻨﻜﺴﻑ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺸﺭﻴﻙ‬
.54
. ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺸﻬﺭ ﺭﻤﻀﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ‬
“ Sha rīk () ha s re late d: I wa s inform e d that befor e the
app ear ance of M ah dī there will be lun ar ec lipse t wic e in
the month of Rama dān.”1
1.
2.
Ibn Hammad transmitted it in al-Fitan (1:360#1050); and Suyūtī
copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:83).
Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:82); and Ibn
Hammād in al-Fitan (1:229#642).
55
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.55
‫ ﻓﻌﻨﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬, ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ‬:‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬
. ‫ ﻭﻴﺸﺭﺒﻭﻥ ﺤﺒﻪ ﻭﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﻡ ﺫﻜﺭ ﻏﻴﺭﻩ‬, ‫ﺃﻓﻭﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬
“ ‘Alī () said: when the anno unce r will anno un ce that
the tr uth is in the fam ily of M uh amma d  , at that t ime
ev eryone will be talk in g a bo ut M ah dī’ s a rriv al an d his
love will be f e d into them ( in such a mann er) that they
will ta lk of nothin g e lse but h im.”2
‫ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ‬, ‫ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺩ‬
.56
‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺍﻵﺨﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻭﻁ ﻴﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺫﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻑ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﺄﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻓﺔ ﺨﻴﺭ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬, ‫ﺘ ﺴﺘﺤل ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺭﻡ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬
.‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻫﻨﻴﺎ‬
“ Abū Jala d () n arrate s: a disr uption will ar ise wh ich
will be fo llo we d by anothe r disr uption. T he fir st will be
r elate d to the se con d disr uption a s the lac e is jo ine d to its
wh ip (me anin g they will be c lo se ly r elate d, either the
se con d will imm e diate ly fo llo w the fir st o r their content
will be similar ). T hen ther e will be the ( disr uption of)
swor ds. It will be fo llo we d by another disr uption in wh ich
a ll for bidden th in gs will be dec lar e d pe rmissible . T hen the
c aliphate will come a bo ut, thro ugh the be st per son
amon gst the peop le. If will come a bo ut wh ilst he is sittin g
at hom e.”3
1.
2.
3.
Ibn Abī Shaybah narrated it in al-Musannaf (7:531#37754); and
Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:65).
56
‫ ﻴﺤﺞ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭﻭ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
.57
‫ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎﻫﻡ ﻨﺯﻭل ﺒﻤﻨﻰ ﺇﺫ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﻓﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺘﻠﻭﺍ ﺤﺘﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﺜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺌل ﺒﻌﻀﻬ ﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬,‫ﺃﺨﺫﻫﻡ ﻜﺎﻟﻜﻠﺏ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻔﺯﻋﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺨﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻭﻨﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻠﺼﻕ‬,‫ﺘﺴﻴل ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺩﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻠﻡ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻟﻭﻥ‬, ‫ ﻴﺒﻜﻲ ﻜﺄﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻤﻭﻋﻪ‬, ‫ﻭﺠﻬﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ ﻭﻜﻡ ﺩﻡ ﻗﺩ‬,‫ ﻭﻴﺤﻜﻡ ﻜﻡ ﻋﻬﺩ ﻗﺩ ﻨﻘﻀﺘﻤﻭﻩ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻓﻠﻨﺒﺎﻴﻌﻙ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺭﻜﺘﻤﻭﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻩ‬,‫ﺴﻔﻜﺘﻤﻭﻩ! ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻜﺭﻫﺎ‬
. ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘Amr () n arrate s: peop le will pe rform
the p ilgr ima ge together an d will gather at ‘Ar afāt without
the Im ām. So at M inā dur in g the ir de sc ent a r evolt will
po unc e upon the m like a do g ( due to wh ich) th e tribe s will
po unc e on on e another . T hey will k ill one another until
the v alley be gin s to flo w with in bloo d. (In this worr ie d
st ate) they will go to the be st p er son a mon gst them to seek
h is ref uge while he will be cry in g with h is fa ce to uch in g
the ka‘bah a s (the narr ator say s) I am lookin g at h is te ar s.
So th ey will re quest h im: plea se come! We want to take an
oath of loya lty on yo ur han d. He will say: it is very sa d
that yo u have broken so m any promises an d hav e she d so
m uch bloo d. So, un willin gly, he will a cc ept their o ath. So
wh en yo u fin d th at per son, yo u sho uld t ake the oath on his
han d bec a use he will be Mah dī on e arth a s we ll a s Mah dī
in the he aven s. ”1
1.
Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:503,504#8537); Ibn
Hammād, al-Fitan (1:227, 341, 342 # 632, 987); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1044, 1045 # 560); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī
lil-fatāwā (2:76).
57
Secti on 12
Imam Mahdī ( ) as the Last Caliph
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.58
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺘﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻡ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﻜﻼﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻟﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬:‫ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭل؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻓ ﻘﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ‬,‫ﺃﻓﻬﻤﻪ‬
“ It is narr ate d by Jā bir ibn Sam urah () : I h ear d the
M essen ger o f Allāh  say : I slam will rema in
e sta blishe d until t we lve ca liph s h ave r ule d over yo u. T he
Ummah will be un ite d on all of them .
“ T hen I hear d the Prophet  say (som ethin g)
wh ich I co uld not un der stan d. I a ske d my f ather: wh at is
he sayin g? He told m e that he h a d sa id: a ll (the t we lve
c aliph s) will be from the Qur ay sh.”1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.59
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل ﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬,‫ ﻓﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻭﻀﺠﻭﺍ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬.‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬: ‫ ﻴﺎ ﺃﺒﺔ! ﻤﺎ ﻗﺎل؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ‬,‫ﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬
“ Jā bir ibn Sam urah () ha s na rrate d that he he ar d the
M essen ger o f Allāh  say : I slam will rem ain do minant
until t welv e ca liph s hav e p a sse d.” Jā bir () sa id: ( at this)
peop le sa id ( lo udly:) “ Allāh is the greate st” an d it bec ame
1.
‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (13:212); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-unnubuwwah (6:520).
Ahmad bin Hambal transmitted it with different words in alMusnad (5:93, 92, 98).
58
no isy a ll aro un d. T hen the Prophet  sa id so methin g
quietly. I a ske d my father : O father! What did h e say?
(My f ather told me :) he said, “ All those (t welv e ca liph s)
will be from the Qur ay sh.”1
Im am Suy ūtī comments on Abū Dā wūd’ s
na rration in a l-Hā wī lil-fa tā wā (2 :85) :
‫ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬,‫ﻋﻘﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺩﺍﺅﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ﺼﺩﺭﻩ ﺤﺩﻴﺙ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
:‫ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺭﻭﺍﻴﺔ‬.‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺘﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
.‫ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬
‫ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻻﺜﻨﻰ‬:‫ﻓﺄﺸﺎﺭ ﺒﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ‬
.‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬
“ Abū Dā wūd ha s devote d a chapter to Imām
M ah dī in his book a s-Sunan (4 :86). In the
be ginnin g of the ch apter a nar ration of Jā bir ibn
Sa m ur ah () is given . T he M essen ger of Allāh
 said: “ unt il t welv e ca liphs h ave p asse d, on
who m th is Ummah will un ite. ” Ac cor din g to
another tra dition, “ this dīn will r ema in do minant
till the t welv e ca liphs h ave p asse d an d all of them
will be from the Qur ay sh.”
1.
Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:86 (#4280,
4281); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (5:93, 97, 98, 101); and
‘Asqalānī in Fath-ul-bārī (13:211).
Muslim related it with some different words in as-Sahīh, b. of
imārah (emritage) 3:1453 (#7/1821).
59
“ In this ch apter Abū Dā wūd ha s r eferr e d to the
op inion of scho la rs who be lieve that Imām Mah dī
is one of those t we lve caliph s.”
T he conc lusion Suy ūtī ha s dra wn from this is that
Im ām Mah dī will be the t we lfth an d la st Im ām on this
e arth.1
Abū Dā wūd, after intro ducin g the chapter with the se
t wo tra dition s, h as in clude d the fo llo win g narr ation:
‫ ﺴﻤ ﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬
. ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
“ Nar rate d by Umm Salamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬that she
he ar d the M e ssen ger of Allāh () say in g: M ah dī will be
from my fa mily an d from the children of Fātim ah.”2
Befo re it he ha s de scribe d the tra dition which say s that
ev en if on ly one day r ema ins in the arr iva l of the Day of
Judgment, Allāh will sen d a per son (na me d Mah dī) from
the Prophet’ s f amily who will f ill the earth with justice
an d fa irne ss just a s it was forme rly fille d with tyranny an d
a ffect ion.
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.59
‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻨﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻁﺎﺅﻩ ﻫﻨﻴﺌﺎ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ ﺭﺠل ﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Abū Sa ‘īd () ha s narr ate d that the Prophet 
sa id: In the last day s when so many disr uption s will
app ear , at that tim e ther e will be a per son ca lle d Mah dī.
His contr ibution s will be (ve ry) p lea sant. ”3
1.
2.
3.
Suyūtī, al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:85).
Related by Abū Dāwūd in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4284).
Ibn Hammād transmitted it in as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan
(5:1057, 1061 # 575, 581).
Dhahabī graded it marfū‘ (traceable) in Mīzān-ul -i‘tidāl fi
naqd-ir-rijāl (3:126).
60
‫ )ﺇﺫﺍ ( ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺘﺎل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭﻱ‬
.60
‫ ﺃﻻ! ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ‬:‫ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻴﺴﻤﻊ ﺼﻭﺕ ﻤ ﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻓﻼﻥ‬
‫ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻭﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻜﻔﺎ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ﻭﻗﺎﻟﺕ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺒﻨﺕ ﻋﻤﻴﺱ‬
. ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﺩﻻﺓ ﻴﻨﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎ ﺱ‬
“ Z uhrī ha s na rrate d: when Sufyān’ s (a rmy) an d
M ah dī’ s army will f ac e e ach other fo r battle, on th at day a
vo ice will be h ear d fro m the sky: ‘ be ware! Sure ly, the
fr ien ds of (Imā m) M ah dī are the fr ien ds of Allāh .’
“ An d Asmā’ bint ‘Um ay s sa id: the sign of that day
will be that a han d will be se en h an gin g f rom the sky
wh ich (a ll) the peop le will see .”1
‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﺃﻤﻨﺎ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.61
‫ ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ‬,‫ ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻴﺭﻨﺎ؟ ﻓﻘﺎل‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﻨﻘﺫﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻘﺫﻭﺍ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻟﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻟﻑ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺼﺒﺤﻭ ﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬
. ‫ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﺒﺤﻭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﻬﻡ‬
Narr ated by ‘ Alī () , he sa id: I sa id (to the Prophet
( )) : O M e ssen ger of Allāh (‫ !)ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠ ﯿﻚ و ﺳﻠﻢ‬W ill
M ah dī be from us, the fam ily of M uh amma d or from
other s? He said: no, but h e will be from amon g us, Allāh
will re-e sta blish I slam thro ugh h im as he did so ( in the
be ginnin g) thro ugh us, an d the se peop le will be re sc ue d
from mischie f thro ugh us ( Mah dī) as th ey h ave been save d
from polythe ism . An d thro ugh o ur mean s (Mah dī) Allāh
will cr eate lov e in their he arts a fter the hatr e d of m ischief
1.
61
a s He cr eate d lov e in their h eart s after the hatre d of
po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur me ans peop le will be come
brother ly amon gst e ach othe r after th e r iva lry of t urmo ils
a s they have done so in I slam after the riv alry of
po lytheism." 1
‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺭﻁﺎﺓ‬
.62
,‫ ﻴﻐﺯﻭ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﻴﺼﺭ‬,‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺤﺴﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺭﺓ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ‬,‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻭﻴﻨﺯل ﻓﻲ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
“ Artāh h as narr ate d that a pe rson (Mah dī) will appe ar
from the Proph et’s fam ily who will fight in the c ity of
Rome an d h e will be the la st le a der (Imām ) of
M uh amma d’ s Umm ah. Da jjāl will appe ar in his t ime an d
in his tim e a lso ‘Ī sā  will de scen d (from the
he aven) .”2
“ Imam Suy ūtī in a l-Hā wī lil-fa tā wā (2 :80) after
listin g the sign s of th e arr ival of Imām Mah dī,
comm ents:
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﺜﺎﺭ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ "ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ" ﻟﻨﻌﻴﻡ ﺒﻥ‬
.‫ ﻭﺃﺤﺩ ﺸﻴﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭﻱ‬,‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬,‫ﺤﻤﺎﺩ‬
“ All these signs wh ich I have summar ise d
from the book “ al-F itan ” by Nu‘ aym ibn Hammā d
who wa s a hāfiz (of hadīth) an d on e of th e tea cher s
of Imām Bukh ārī.”
1.
2.
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-awsat (1:136 # 157); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:370,
371 # 1089, 1090); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:316,
317).
Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:402,408#1214,1234); and
Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:80).
62
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
.63
‫ ﻻ‬, ‫ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺜﺎ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
Prophet  said: In my Ummah, soon, there will be a
c aliph who will distribute goo ds gen ero usly without
ke epin g a r ecor d of who ha s r ece ive d what. ”1
‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
the M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: T here will be a caliph
in my Um mah who will genero usly distribute wealth
witho ut k eep in g a r ecor d of it. An d I swe ar by the One
who controls my life! Certa inly that the dom inan ce (of
I slam) will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ecapt ure its lost
glory an d retrieve its stat us dur in g his re ign).”2
1.
2.
Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:60, 61).
about it.
wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).
63
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.65
‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻟ ﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠ ﻙ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﺍﺴﻡ‬, ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﻭ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﺒﻲ‬
,‫ ﻭﻴﺠﻌل ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺒﺎﻟﺴﻭﻴﺔ‬
. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬, ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬
“ Nar rate d by ‘Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that
M essen ger o f Allāh  sa id: if th ere wa s on ly on e night
left for this world to stay in ta ct, Allāh will len gthen it
until a mem ber of my fam ily becom es the r uler who se
nam e will be the same as my n ame an d the nam e of his
f ather will be the sam e a s the nam e of my f ather. He will
f ill the world with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s f ille d
with tyranny an d explo itation. He will distribute thin gs
e qually amon g the people an d Allāh will also fill the ir
he arts with content. He will r ule for sev en or nin e ye ar s.
T hen a fter the ca liph ate of Mah dī, ther e will be a total en d
to goo dne ss ( an d virtue ).”1
1
.
Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:133, 135 # 10216, 10224); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1055 # 572); Haythamī, Mawārid-uzzam’ān (6:129 # 1877); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:269 #
38683).
Haythamī also narrated it through Abū Hurayarah (rt a) in
Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:128 # 1876).
Suyūtī narrated it with a di fference of words at another place
in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).
Glossary
:
rad iya llāhu ‘anhu — Allāh be plea se d with h im: use d
a fter the na me of Comp anion of the Prophet ( ).
‫رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨ ﮭﺎ‬: radiyallāhu ‘anhā — Allāh be p lea se d with
he r: use d a fter the n ame of a f ema le Comp anion of the
Prophet ( ).
‫ رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨ ﮭﻢ‬: rad iya llāhu ‘anhum — Allāh be ple a se d
with all of them : use d after the nam es of mor e than t wo
ma le Co mpanion s o f the Prophet ( ).
‫ رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬: radiya llāhu ‘anhumā — Allāh is ple a se d
with both of them; use d after the name s of t wo
Compan ion s of the Proph et (), irre sp ectiv e of the ir
gen der.
:
‘ala yh-is- sa lām — ( May Allāh sho wer His) pea ce on
h im: use d a fter the n ame of Allāh’ s m e ssen ger , prophet
an d an ge l.
‫ﻋﻠﯿ ﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﻼم‬: ‘ala yhim-a s- salām — (M ay Allāh sho wer
His) p ea ce on both of them: use d after the n ame s of t wo
me ssen ger s, proph ets an d an gels.
:
sallallāhu ‘alayh i wa ālihī wa sa llam — Allāh ble ss
an d sen d pea ce on h im an d h is ch ildren : use d afte r the
nam e of the La st M essen ger of Allāh ( ).
abdāl: pl. of badal. lit. Substit ute s. A per son by whom
Allāh contin ue s the wor ld in existenc e as mention e d in the
tra dition s. T heir n um ber is seventy, of whom fo rty liv e in
Sy ria an d thirty e lse wh ere. Wh en one die s another take s
h is place , be in g appo inte d by Allāh .
65
66
athar: p l. ā thā r. lit. re latin g. Gener ally use d for a
na rration r elate d from one of the Compan ions, rather than
from the Prophet ( ), which is kno wn a s hadīth.
cali ph ate : khilāfah . T his is the po litica l sy stem of I slam,
it s h ea d the ca liph /kha līfah is the succ e ssor of the Prophet
( ) in this r e gar d.
dīn: it is an Ar a bic wor d use d for I slam. It is mo re
spe cif ic ia lly use d for the re ligion an d rev ea le d book s of
the prophets an d the me ssen ger s. It is a comp rehen sive
term cove rin g not only re ligio us pr actice s an d r ituals but
a lso app lie s to all a sp ects of lif e an d prov ide s guidan ce
for it. While madhab (re ligion) is r e stricte d to man’ s
spirit ua l life an d dea ls with its r elation ship with Go d
a lone .
din ar: an an cient go ld coin.
fajr: da wn or e arly morn in g be fore sunr ise ; morn in g
pr ayer.
ghawth: lit. on e to whom we can cry for h elp . A
me diator ; a title given to a sa int of the h ighe st or der .
h adīth : p l. ahādīth. lit. tra dition. T he say in gs, pr actice
an d approv e d tra dit ions of the Prophet M uh amma d () .
h āfiz : lit. a guar dian or protector. (1) on e o f the name s of
Go d, a l-Hāfiz. (2) a governor , guar dian of the M akkan
temp le. (3) one who ha s memo riz e d the whole of the
Qur’ān. (4) one who h a s memo rize d on e h un dr e d tho usan d
tra dition s.
h asan: a hadīth, na rrate d by a re lia ble ch ain of n arr ators
tho ugh not r each in g the gr a de o f sahīh ( so un d) hadīth, but
r ecor ds a comp lete cha in of nar rators up to the Prophet
( ).
Imām: (1) on e who lea ds p eople in pr ayer s; (2) an
em inent I slam ic scho la r; (3 ) spir itual lea der of the
M uslim s. T her e will be tota l of t welv e such Im ām s, the
f ir st bein g Imām ‘Alī () an d the la st Imām Mah dī ( ).
Gl os s ar y
67
iqāmah : a ca ll sim ilar to the adhān (the c all to p raye r),
sa id imme diately befor e a con gr e gationa l pr ayer .
‘Īsā (): nam e o f Allah’ s pen ultimate m essen ger, Je sus.
He will come do wn from the he aven s durin g the time of
Im ām M ah dī ().
ka‘bah: a c ube- shap e d buildin g at the centre of a lM asjid- ul- Har ām (the gre at mo sque at M akkah) to war ds
wh ich a ll M uslims fa ce in pray er. It is a lso kno wn a s the
Ho use of Allah.
maqām Ibrāh īm: th e stone at Makkah with in the
bo un da ry of al- Ma sjid- ul-Harām , wh ich ha s the
impre ssion of the footprint s of th e Prophet I brāh īm ( ).
T his is the stone on which I br āhīm () stood wh ile he
an d h is son, the Prophet Ismā‘ īl ( ), were buildin g the
ka ‘bah.
Maryam: the mother of p rophet ‘Ī sā ; M ary.
sah īh: so un d. A had īth with an un brok en chain of
na rrator s ran gin g f rom the Prophet M uh amma d () an d
app roach in g an er a thro ugh re lia ble narr ators without
be in g shādh (o dd) or mu‘alla l (f a ulty) in bet ween the t wo
c ross relater s.
sh arī‘ah : lit. roa d. It is a le ga l sy stem of a nation ba se d
on the rev elation of their p rophet/m essen ger. T he last
sha rī‘ah is that of I slam that r eplace s a ll pr evio us
sha rī‘ah s.
s pi ritual leade rshi p: imāmah. T his status will be he ld
by t we lve Imām s, the f ir st of wh ich was ‘Alī al- M urta dā
( ), an d the la st Imām Mah dī () .
s pi ritual sove reignty: wilā yah; sainthoo d. A spe cia l
spirit ua l stat us wh ich ra ise s the per son a bove that of
norm al peop le. T her e are var io us leve ls an d gra des of
wilāyah such a s gha wth, qu tb, etc.
su nnah : pl. sunan. lit. the path, way o r a form, the
c ustomary pra ctic e of a p er son or a gro up of peop le. It ha s
68
com e to ref er almo st ex clusive ly to the le ga l way o r way s,
or ders, statement s an d act s of wor sh ip, etc., o f the Prophet
M uh amma d () wh ich hav e become th e mo dels to be
fo llo we d by M uslim s.
tābi‘ī: so meone who h as met a Comp anion o f the Ho ly
Prophet ( ) in the state of īmān (fa ith) an d die d as a
be liever .
Bibliography
The Holy Qu r’ān .
‘ Abd- ur- Ra zzā q, Abū Bakr, San‘ān ī (126-211/744 -826),
a l-Mu sanna f, Kar ach i, Pak istan: a l-Ma jlis- ul-‘ilm ī, 1 st
e d. 1390/1970 .
Abū ‘Awānah , Ya ‘ qūb ibn Ish ā q ibn I brāh īm ibn Zay d
(230-316 /845-928), al- Mu snad, Be ir ut, Le banon: 1 st
e d. 1998.
Abū Dā wūd, Sulaym ān ibn Ash‘ ath ibn I shā q ibn Bash īr
Sijistān ī
(202-275 /817-889),
as-Sunan,
Be ir ut,
L e banon : Dār- ul-Fikr, 1414 /1994.
Abū Nu‘aym , Ahm a d ibn ‘ Abdullāh Asbahān ī (336430 /948-1038), Hilyat-ul-a wliyā’ wa tabaqāt-u la sfiyā’ , Beir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-k itā b-il-‘ ara bī, 3 rd e d.
1400 /1980.
Abū Ya‘ lā, Ahm a d ibn ‘Alī (210-307 /825-919) , a lMusnad , Dama sc us, Syr ia : Dā r- ul-ma’m ūn lit-t urāth,
1 s t e d. 1404/1984 .
Ah ma d ibn Ham bal, I bn M uh amma d (164-241/780 -855),
a l-Mu snad, Beir ut, L e banon : a l-Makta b- ul-I slām ī, 2 nd
e d. 1398/1978 .
‘ Ajla wnī, Abū a l-Fidā’ I smā‘ īl ibn M uham ma d ibn ‘ Abdul-Hā dī (1087-1162/1676-1749 ), Ka shf-u l- khifā’ wa
muzīl-ul- ilbā s, Beir ut, L e banon : M u’ assisat- ur-r isālah,
4 th e d. 1405/1985.
Albān ī, M uhamm a d Nā sir- ud-Dīn (1333-1420/1914 -1999),
S ilsila t-ul-ahād īth-is- sah īhah, Be ir ut, Le banon : a lM akta b- ul- Islām ī, 4 th e d. 1405 /1985.
69
70
‘ Asqalānī, I bn Hajar Ahm a d ibn ‘ Alī (773-852 /13721449), Fa th-ul-bārī, Lahor e, Pak istan: Dār n ash r-ilk ut ub-il-I slāmiyy ah, 1401 /1981.
l al-I sābah fī tamyīz-is- sahābah, Beir ut, Le banon :
Dār- ul-jīl, 1 s t e d. 1412/1992 .
l a l- Matā lib-ul- ‘āliyah, M akkah, Sa udi Ar a bia :
‘ Abbā s Ah ma d al- Bā z, n . d.
Az dī, Ma‘m ar ibn Rā shid (95-153 /713-770) , a l- Jāmi‘,
Be ir ut, L e banon : a l-M aktab- ul- Islam i, 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .
Baghawī, Abū Muhammad Husayn ibn Mas‘ūd (436-516/10441122), Sha rh-u s- sunnah, Beirut, Lebanon: al-Maktab-ulIslāmī, 2 nd ed. 1403/1983.
Bayh a qī, Ahma d ibn Husayn (384-458 /994-1066), Dalā’ilun-nubuwwah, Beirut, Lebanon: Dār-ul-kutub-il-‘ilmiyyah,
1 st ed. 1405/1985.
l a s-Sunan-ul-kub rā, M ultan, Pak istan: Na shr- ussunnah, n. d.
Ba zzā r, Abū Bakr Ahma d ibn ‘Am r (210-292/825 -905),
a l-Mu snad, Beir ut, Le banon: 1 st e d. 1409 AH .
Bukhārī, Muhammad ibn Ismā‘īl (194-256/810-870), as-Sahīh,
Damascus, Syria: Dār-ul-qalam, 1 st ed. 1401/1981.
Dānī, Abū ‘ Amr ‘Uthmān ibn Sa‘īd ibn ‘ Uthmān ibn Sa‘ īd
ibn ‘Um ar M uqrī (371-444/981 -1052), a s-Sunan-u lwā ridah fil-fitan , Riya dh, Sa udi Ara b: Dā r- ul- ‘ā sim ah,
1 s t e d. 1416.
Daylamī, Abū Sh ujā‘ Shīr a wayh (445-509 /1053-1115) , a lF irdaws, Beir ut, L e banon : Dā r- ul-k ut ub- il- ‘ilmiyy ah,
1 s t e d. 1986.
Dh aha bī, M uhamm a d ibn Ahm a d ibn ‘Uthmān (673748 /1274-1348), Mīzān-u l-i‘ tidāl fī naqd-ir- rijā l,
Be ir ut, Le banon : Dār- ul-k utub- il-‘ilm iyyah, 1 s t e d.
1995.
Hākim , Abū ‘Abdullāh M uhamm a d ibn ‘Abdullāh (321405 /933-1014), a l- Mustad rak, Beir ut, L e banon : Dārul-k utub- il-‘ilm iyyah, 1 st e d. 1411 /1990.
l al- Mu stad ra k, Makk ah, Sa udi Ar a bia: Dār- ul- bā z,
n. d.
Bibliogr aphy
71
Haythamī, ‘Alī ibn Abū Bakr (735-807/1335 -1405),
Majma‘-u z- za wā’id , Cairo, E gypt: Dār - ur-r iyān litt urāth, 1407 /1987.
l Mawā rid-u z- zam’ān, Beir ut, Le banon : Dār- ulk ut ub-il-‘ ilm iyyah , n. d.
Hin dī, ‘ Alā’- ud- Dīn ‘Alī a l-M uttaqī ( d.975 AH ), Kan z-u l‘ummāl, Be ir ut, Le banon : M u’a ssisat- ur -risā lah , 2 nd
e d. 1407/1986 .
I bn Abī Sh ay bah, Abū Bak r ‘Abdullāh ibn M uh amma d
(159-235 /776-850), al- Mu sannaf, Riya dh , Sa udi Ara b:
M akta bat- ur-r ush d, 1 st e d. 1409 AH .
I bn ‘Asākir , Abū al-Qā sim ‘Alī ibn Ha san (499-571 /11051176), Tā rikh Dimashq a l-kab īr, gener ally kno wn a s
Tārīkh Ibn ‘A sākīr, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār ihyā ’-itt urāth a l-‘ ara bī, 1 s t e d. 1421 /2001.
I bn Hamm ā d, Abū ‘Abdullāh Nu‘ aym ( d. 229 /884), a lF itan , Ca iro, E gypt : M aktabat- ut-ta whīd, 1 st e d. 1412.
I bn Hibbān , M uh amma d (270-354 /884-965) , a s-Sah īh,
Be ir ut, Le banon : M u’ assisat- ur-r isālah, 2 nd e d.
1414 /1993.
I bn Jār ūd, Abū M uh amma d ‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Alī ( d. 307 /
919), a l-Mun taqā, Be ir ut, L e banon : M u’a ssisat-ulk itāb ath-tha qāf iyyah , 1 st e d. 1408/1988.
I bn Kathīr , Abū al- Fidā’ I smā ‘īl ibn ‘Uma r (701774 /1301-1373), al-Bidā yah wan-n ihāyah , Be ir ut,
L e banon : Dār- ul-fik r, 1419 /1998.
l Ta fsīr-u l-Qu r’ān a l-‘a zīm, Be ir ut, Le banon: Dār- ulma ‘rif ah, 1400 /1980.
I bn M ājah, Abū ‘Abdullah M uhamm a d ibn Yazīd Qaz wīn ī
(209-273 /824-887), Sunan, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ulk ut ub-il-‘ ilm iyyah , 1 st e d. 1419/1998.
I bn M un dah, Abū ‘Abdullāh M uh amma d ibn I shā q ibn
Yahyā (310 -395/922-1005 ), al-Īmān, Beir ut, Le banon :
M u’ a ssisat- ur-r isā lah, 2 nd e d. 1406 AH .
Ibn Qayyim, ‘Abū ‘Abdullāh Muhammad al-Jawziyyah (691751/1292-1350), al- Manā r-u l-munīf, Ha la b, Sy ria :
M akta b- ul- matbū‘āt-il-I slām ī, 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .
72
Kh atīb Ba gh dā dī, Abū Bakr Ahm a d ibn ‘Alī, (392463 /1002-1071), Tā rīkh Baghdad, Be ir ut, Le banon :
Dār- ul-kitā b-il-‘a ra bī, n. d.
Khatīb T abrīzī, Muhammad ibn ‘Abdullāh, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh,
Beirut, Lebanon: Dār-ul-fikr, 1st ed. 1411/1991.
Kinān ī, ِA hma d ibn Abī Bakr ibn I smā‘ īl (762-840 AH ),
Misbāh-u z- zujā jah, Beir ut, Le banon : 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .
M anā wī, ‘ Abd- ur- Ra wf, Fa yd-u l-qadīr, E gypt: Makta batut-tujjāriyy ah al-k ubr ā, 1356 AH .
M iz zī, Yūsuf ibn ‘Abd- ur -Rahmān (654-742/1256 -1341),
Tuhfa t-ul-ash rā f b i-ma‘rifa t- il-a trāf, Be ir ut, Le banon :
a l-M akta b- ul-I slā mī, 2 nd e d. 1403/1983 .
Muslim, Ibn-ul-Hajjāj Qushayrī (206-261/821-875), as-Sahīh,
Beirut, Lebanon: Dār Ihyā’-it-turāth-il-‘arabī, n.d.
M uja ddid Alf T hānī, Shaykh Ahm a d Sarhan dī (9711034 /1564-1624), Mak tūbāt Imam Rabbānī, Lahor e,
Pak istan : Nūr Co., n. d.
Qurtubī, Abū ‘Abdullāh, Muhammad ibn Ahmad (284-380/897990), al-Jāmi‘ li-ahkām-il-Qur’ān, Cairo, Egypt: Dār-ushsha‘b, 2nd ed. 1372 AH .
Ru’yān ī, Abū Bakr M uh amma d ibn Hār ūn ( d. 307 AH ) , a lMusnad , Cairo , E gypt: M u’a ssisah Cor do ba, 1 s t e d.
1416 AH .
Sh āh I sma‘ īl Dihla wī, (1193-1246 /1779-1831), S irā t
mustaqīm.
Sh āh Wa lī Allāh M uha ddith Dih la wī (1114-1174 /17031762), Hama‘āt, Hy der a ba d, P akistan: Aca de my Shāh
Wa lī Allāh M uha ddith Dihla wī, n . d.
l at-Ta fhīmāt-u l- ilāh iy yah, Hy dera ba d, Pak istan:
Aca demy Shāh W alī Allāh M uha ddith Dihla wī,
1387 /1967.
Suy ūt ī, Ja lā l- ud-Dīn ‘ Abd- ur- Rahm ān (849-911 /14451505), ad -Du rr-ul-manthūr fit- tafsīr bil-ma’thū r,
Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-ma‘r if ah, n. d.
l a l-Hā wi lil- fatā wā, Faisala ba d, Pakistan: M akta bah
Nūriyy ah Ridwiyy ah, n. d.
Bibliogr aphy
73
T a bar ānī, Sulaymān ibn Ahma d (260-360 /873-971), a lMu‘jam-u l-a wsa t, Cairo , E gypt: Dā r- ul-h aram ayn,
1415 AH .
l a l- Mu‘jam-u l-kab īr, Mosul, Ira q: Mat ba‘ at-uzz uh rā’- il-ha dīthah , 2 nd e d. 1404 /1983.
l a l- Mu‘ jam-us- saghīr, Beir ut, Le banon: al- Makta bul-I slami, 1 st e d. 1405/1985.
l Mu snad-ush -shāmiyy īn, Beir ut, Le banon : M u’a ssisat
- ur- risā lah , 1 st e d. 1405/1984.
T irm idhī, Abū ‘Ī sā M uh amma d ibn ‘Ī sā (210-279 /825892), a l-Jāmi‘-us-sah īh, Be ir ut, Le banon: Dār- ulgha r b-il-I slāmī, 2 nd e d. 1998.
‫‪Index to Hadīth and Athar‬‬
‫‪Arabic‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺘﺎل ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺃﺒﺸﺭﻜﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻘﺘل ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻭﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻜﻔﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺘﺎﺒﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻨﻜﺴﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻜﻡ ﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺴ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺜﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺭﻡ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺘﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺯل ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻜﻡ‪ ,‬ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ ﻤﻨﻜﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻻ‪ ,‬ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‪ ,‬ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪44, 60‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺘﺫﻫﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﻁﺎﺌﻔﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﺠﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﺠﺄ ﻴﻠﺘﺠﺊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪57, 58‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻡ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪24, 63,‬‬
‫ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ‪ ,‬ﻟﻁﻭ‪‬ل ﺍﷲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟ ﻴﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻟﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‪ ,‬ﻭﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\08‬‬‫‪Index-Arabic (75-78).doc‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫)‪Index to Hadīth and Athar (Arabic‬‬
‫ﻤﻥ ﻜ ﻨﺕ ﻤﻭﻻﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻤﻭﻻﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1, 7‬‬
‫ﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﻟﻭﻨﻪ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪19, 59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ ﻴﺼﻠﺤﻪ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ‪ ,‬ﺃﺸﻡ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﻲ‪ ,‬ﺃﺠﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﻬﺔ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻨﺤﻥ ﻭ‪‬ﻟﹶﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻁﻠﺏ ﺴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺠﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻨﻌﻡ‪ ,‬ﻫﻭ ﺤﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨ ﻲ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻫﻡ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻗﻠﻴل ﻭﺠﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻨﺘﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺘﻠﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪ ,‬ﺜﻡ ﻋﻘﺩ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﺎل‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻙ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺒﻌﺜﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻟﺤﻕ! ﺇﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻟﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻜﻌﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻴﺤﺞ ﺍﻟ ﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﻓﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺨﻔﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ ﻋﻤﺎﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻭل ﺒﺴﻨﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ,‬ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺴﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﻴﻁﻠﻊ ﻨﺠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﻴﻘﺘﺘل ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜﻨﺯﻜﻡ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬
‫‪25, 27‬‬
‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻨﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪40, 44‬‬
‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪35, 39, 62,‬‬
‫ﻴﻠﺘﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻭﺍﻁ ﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻴﻭﺸﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺴﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻨﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻫﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\08‬‬‫‪Index-Arabic (75-78).doc‬‬
Index to Hadīth and Athar
Englis h
A com et with a bright ta il will app ear from
the ea st.
A disr uption will ar ise which will be
fo llo we d by another disr uption.
A per son will appe ar f rom my f amily who
will p rea ch
A per son, Mah dī, will appe ar fro m the
Prophet’ s fa mily.
A section of my p eople will not c ea se
f ightin g for the T ruth.
A time will com e wh en the intensity of
oppr ession.
‘ Alī is yo ur spir it ua l lea de r.
At m inim um the dur ation of the ca liph ate of
M ah dī.
At the death of a Ca liph there will be a
differ enc e of op inion .
Ev en if only one day rem ain s befor e the en d
of the wor ld.
He will be from the ch ildren of Fātimah.
‘Ī sā  will de scen d after Mah dī an d will
off er.
I am givin g yo u the goo d n e ws of the com in g
of Mah dī.
I swea r by the One who ha s sent me with the
T ruth!
I wa s inform e d that befor e the app ear anc e of
M ah dī.
I wa s inform e d that the Ark of the Coven ant
54
55
34
61
47
22
7
39
26
19
16
50
38
33
54
54
79
80
will emer ge.
If only on e day wa s to rema in for this wor ld
to stay in tact.
If there wa s on ly one night left for th is wor ld
to stay in tact.
In (the month of) M uh arr am, an anno un cer
will ca ll o ut.
In my Umm ah soon there will be a ca liph
who will distr ibute.
In the last days when so many disr uption s
app ear .
I slam will rem ain dom inant until t we lve
c aliph s
I slam will rem ain e stablish e d until t we lve
c aliph s.
M ah dī will app ear after the m ur der o f ‘ Naf s
Z akiyy ah’.
M ah dī will app ear in the la st day s.
M ah dī will be bo rn dur in g the la st day s of
my Ummah.
M ah dī will be from m e.
M ah dī will be from my children .
M ah dī will be from my fam ily.
M ah dī will be from my p ro geny.
M ah dī will be from this Ummah an d will
lea d ‘Ī sā
M ah dī will com e an d there will be a tur ban
on h is he a d.
Near to the en d of time, a Caliph (M ah dī)
will come.
No , but he will be from amon g us.
On e of my ch ildr en will be the ca liph.
Peop le exactly e qua l in n um ber to the
Compan ion s of Ba dr.
Peop le will perform the pilgr ima ge together.
Prophet ‘Ī sā ibn Mary am will de scen d.
T hat time is ne ar wh en ne ither dinar s no r
21
24, 63
52
62
59
57
57
43
32
37
22
16
19
21, 28,
31, 59
51
53
22, 31
60
18
25
56
49, 50
19
Book\09-Index-Englis h (79-82).doc
Index to Hadīth and Athar (English)
gr ain.
T he Ar a bs will be in small n um ber.
T he Day of Judgement will not com e until a
pe rson .
T he Day of Judgm ent will not come until the
e arth is f ille d with tyranny.
T he e arth will be fille d with tyranny an d
oppr ession.
T he nam e of Mah dī will be M uha mma d.
T he sign o f that day will be that a han d will
be seen.
T he time is n ear when the riv er E uph rate s.
T he wor ld will not seize to ex ist unt il
someon e from my fam ily.
T here will be a c aliph in my Ummah who
will genero usly.
T here will be a pe rson from this Ummah an d
‘Ī sā
T here will be diff eren ce of opin ion ove r the
de ath of the caliph.
T here will be Mah dī in my Um mah.
T here will be p ea ce bet ween yo u an d Rom e
fo ur time s.
T his dīn will r ema in domin ant till the t welv e
c aliph s
T hree p er son s will wa ge wa r ne ar yo ur
trea sur e.
Unt il t welv e c aliph s hav e pa sse d on whom
this Ummah will unite.
We , the ch ildren of ‘Abd- ul-M uttalib.
What will be the state (of yo ur joy) at the
tim e wh en ‘Ī sā
When Islam (ie the state of the Umm ah)
be come s weak .
When Mah dī will appea r.
When Sufy ān’ s (a rmy) an d Mah dī’ s a rmy
will fac e e ach other .
81
49
35
20
22
17
60
30
18
35, 39,
62
50
27
40, 41,
42, 44
16
58
29
58
15
46
48
50
60
82
When the anno unc er will anno unc e.
Whoev er den ie s (the com in g of) Da jjāl, ha s
sure ly committe d disbelief .
Whoev er ha s me as his m aster .
Ye s, M ah dī is the T r uth.
55
52
1, 7
50
Book\09-Index-Englis h (79-82).doc
General Index
abdā l, 25, 26, 28
‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Amr ( ), 50, 56
‘ Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 17, 18, 24, 63
‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Umar (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 53
‘ Abd- ul- M uttalib (), 15
Abū ‘Alā’ , 20
Abū Bakr as- Siddīq (), 4, 5, 6, 9
Abu a l-Hasan Āburrī, 46
Abū Hur ayrah (), 4 , 30, 35 , 39, 40 , 44, 46
Abū Jala d () , 55
Abū Na drah, 19, 20
Abū Sa ‘īd Kh udrī (), 20, 21, 22, 23, 31 , 34, 37, 38 , 41,
42, 50, 59
Abū Sālih, 19
Abū T ufay l, 32, 33
Abū Um āmah Bāh ilī (), 16 , 49
Ah ma d Sarh an dī, see M uja ddid Alf T hānī
Ah l- us- Sunnah wa l- Jam ā‘ah, 2
‘ Ā’ishah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬, 16
‘ Alī a l-M urta dā (), 1, 2, 4 , 5, 6, 7 , 8, 9, 11, 12, 15 , 21,
28, 32, 44, 55, 60
‘ Alī a l- Hilā lī (), 33
An a s ibn Mā lik (), 4, 15
Artāt, 61
‘ Āsim, 19
Asm ā’ bint ‘Umay s, 60
Ba dr , 32
battle of, 26 , 28, 32
83
84
Bay dā’, 26 , 28
Black Stone, 25 , 28
Ca liph , 5, 6, 18, 19, 20, 23, 26, 27 , 29 , 31, 32, 33, 35,
39, 43, 53, 57, 58, 59, 62, 63
Ca liph ate, 2 , 5, 6, 7, 18 , 24, 26, 27 , 28, 37, 38, 39 , 40,
55
Compan ion s, 2, 4, 5
con sensus, 5
Dajjā l, 48 , 52, 61
Day of Judgement, 1, 20, 35, 46, 59
Democr acy, 6
E le ction, 5
E uphr ates, 30
Fātim ah (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬, 11, 15, 16, 19, 33, 59
Fin ality of me ssen ger ship, 4
gen era l inher itance , 2
Gh a dīr Kh um , 1, 6
Gh a wth- ul-A‘ zam, 9
Hamz ah () , 15
Ha ssan () , 11, 15 , 33
Hā shim, 27
Hera clius, 16
Ho ly Ho use ( Bayt- ul-M uqa dda s), 34
Hudh ayfah (), 31, 50
Husse in ( ), 11, 15, 33
I bn Jur ayh, 47
Im ām, 5 , 11, 12, 13, 18, 22 , 25, 43, 46, 48, 49 , 54, 56,
59, 60, 61
imāmah, see spir itual Le a der ship
interme diation, 2, 11
iqāmah, 49, 51
Ir a q, 25
‘Ī sā ibn Mary am (‫) ﻋﻠ ﯿﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴ ﻼم‬, 46 , 47, 48 , 49, 50 , 51
I slamic dom inan ce, 32 , 35, 40 , 45, 57 , 60
Ja‘f ar ( ), 15
Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 19, 35, 39, 46, 48,
62
37,
43,
58,
52,
General Index
85
Jā bir ibn Sam ur ah (), 57, 58
Jurayr ī, 20
ka ‘bah, 33, 56
Kalb, 26, 28 , 54
tribe, 26, 28
kh ilā fah, see ca liph ate
M ah dī (), 2 , 11, 12 , 13, 15 , 16, 17 , 18, 19 , 20, 21 , 22,
23, 24, 25 , 26, 28, 29, 30 , 31, 32, 33 , 37, 38, 39, 40, 41,
42, 43, 44 , 45, 46, 48, 49 , 50, 51, 52 , 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
59, 60, 61
M akkah, 26, 27, 33
M e din a, 1, 26, 27
M inā, 56
M uh amma d ibn Hana fiyy ah, 32, 33
M ujāh id, 43
M uja ddid Alf T hān ī, 10
M usta wrid ibn Khay lān, 16
muta watir, 6
Naf s Z akiyy ah, 43
po litica l inh eritan ce, 2, 4
Quray sh, 26 , 57, 58
Quray shī, 26
Ram a dān, 54
Rome , 16
Sa ‘ īd ibn M usayy a b, 15
Sh āh W alī Allāh M uh a ddith Dih la wī, 3, 7, 12
Sh āh I sm ā‘īl Dih la wī, 9
Sh ahr ibn Ha wsh a b () , 52
spirit ua l inh eritan ce, 2, 4
spirit ua l lea dersh ip, 5, 6, 8
spirit ua l sover eignty, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13
St ation of I brāh īm, 25, 26, 28
Suf yān ī, 26, 28
Suf yān’ s (army) , 26, 60
Sula ymān ibn ‘Ī sā (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 54
Sula ymān ibn Ha bīb, 16
Suc c e ssor s, 2
86
Sy ria, 19, 25, 28
T ālūt, 33
tasa wwu f, 11
T ha wbān (), 29
‘ Umar Fā r uq () , 5, 9
‘ Umar ibn ‘ Abd- ul-‘Azīz, 20
Umm Salamah (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬, 15 , 16, 19 , 25, 26 , 27, 59
Umm Sh ar īk bint ‘ Abī al-‘Ak ar (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬, 49
Ummah, 2 , 20, 23 , 24, 25, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38 , 40, 41 , 44,
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 58, 61, 62
‘ Uthmān ibn Abī a l-‘ Ās (), 49
wa sīlah, se e interme diation
walī, 6
wilāyah , see sp ir itual sov ere ignty
Z uhr ī, 60
Author’s Arabic and English Books
Arabic Books
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
a t-Ta ssa wa r-ul- Islāmī li- tab ī‘at- il-basha riy yah
Nahj-ut- ta rbiyyat-il-ijtimā‘iyyah fil- Qur’ān
a t-Ta ssa wa r-ut- ta sh rī‘ ī lil-hukm-il-I slāmī
Fa lsafa t-ul-ijtihād wal-‘ālim-ul-mu‘ sir
a l-Ja rīmah fil- fiqh- il-Islāmī
Minhā j-ul-khu tbāt lil-‘ īdayn wa l- jumu‘āt
Qa wā‘ id-u l-iq tisād fil- Islām
a l-Iqtisād-ul-arba wī wan-n izām-u l-misr fil- Islām
Englis h Books
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
‘I rfān-ul-Qu r’ān (pa rt-1)
S īra t-u r-Ra sū l, vo l.1
The Ghadīr Dec la ration
B esee ching fo r Help (I stighāthah)
I slamic Conc ept of Inte rmed iation (T a wassul)
R eal Islamic Faith and the P rophet’s Sta tu re
Gree ting s and Sa luta tions on th e P rophe t ( )
Sp iritua lism and Magne tism
I slamic Ph ilo soph y of Human Life
I slam in Va rious Pe rspe ctive s
I slam and Ch ristianity
I slam and Criminality
Qu r’ān ic Con cep t o f Human Gu idanc e
I slamic Conc ept of Human Na tu re
Div ine Plea sure
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Qu r’ān ic Philo sophy o f B enevo len ce (Ih sān)
I slam and Freedom of Human Will
I slamic P enal Sy stem and its Ph ilo sophy
I slamic Conc ept of La w
Ph ilo sophy of Ijtihād and th e Mode rn Wo rld
Qu r’ān ic Ba sis o f Con stitu tiona l Theo ry
I slam — Th e S tate Re lig ion
Lega l Chara cte r of I slamic Punishmen ts
Lega l Stru ctu re o f I slamic Punishments
Cla ssifica tion o f I slamic Punishments
I slamic Ph ilo soph y of Punishmen ts
I slamic Conc ept of Crime
Qu r’ān on Creation and Expan sion of Unive rse
Crea tion and Evo lution o f th e Unive rse
Crea tion o f Man
I slam on preven tion of Hea rt Disea se s
The Author
D R. T A HI R -U L-Q AD RI is i n need of no introducti on to thos e
affi li at ed to t he many fi el ds, whi ch he has m as t ered duri ng a
s m all peri od of t im e. He is the founding l eader of M i nhaj-ul Quran Int ernat ional (MQ I ), whi ch i s bas ed i n over 80 countri es
of t he worl d. It s m ain aims are working for global peace and
hum an rights, revivi ng Is l ami c values, t eachi ngs and tradit ions
and s t riving for t he unit y of t he Umm ah t hrough a s oci al,
educati onal and polit i cal st ruggl e.
As Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri is pres ent ing the t rue peaceful
m ess age of Is l am pure from i nnovations added int o i t and
i nt ernal and ext ernal politi cal i nfl uences, his work, m es s age
and call are accept ed wit h open arm s. The m ai n reasons bei ng
t hat he has port rayed Is l am as a t ruly moderat e fai th i n i ts
origi nal form, free from any form of extremis m, fanati cis m and
t errori sm. As part of hi s vast s t ruggl e for equalit y, equit y and
equal hum an ri ghts for all, he has writt en over t wo hundred and
fi ft y books on all ki nds of m odern, rel igi ous, s pi rit ual and
s ecul ar is sues in Engl is h, Urdu and Arabi c.
Dr. T ahir-ul -Qadri i s accept ed as one of t he hi ghest
authoriti es in t he worl d on Isl am, Isl am and the W est, Isl am
and S ci ence and m any ot her s ubj ects, whi ch is why he has
delivered thous ands of l ectures i n i nt ernat ional conferences,
uni versit i es and insti tut ions all over the world on all t ypes of
i ss ues. Alt hough he i s a s chol ar and a reli gi ous l eader for
whom t here i s no m at ch, his educati onal, s oci al and poli ti cal
effort s have als o penet rat ed s oci et y. He is l eading a peaceful
m ovem ent i n P akis t an t o liberat e t he poor from the corrupt
ruling eli te, whi ch has ruled t he count ry over t he l as t hal f
century. He is l eading t his revolt by get ti ng the poor and
downtrodden s egm ents of s oci et y behind him. In doi ng s o he
form ed hi s own polit ical party i n 1989 by t he nam e of
“ Pakist an Awami T ehreek” (P akist an Popul ar M ovem ent ),
which has been carrying out t his s truggl e in t he politi cal and
el ect oral arenas. Unli ke any other reli gi ous or poli ti cal
personalit y, Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri and his mi ssi on have at tract ed
peopl e from varyi ng s ects and religions. He and his
organis ati on are the sol e hope for i nt er-s ect and int erfai th
peace, harmony and unit y. His i mm ens e achievem ents in the
fi el d of education and wel fare have been i nt ernati onal ly
recogni s ed by the m any int ernati onal awards he has received.
In a growi ng int ernati onal atm os phere of ant i-Isl ami sm,
pol iti cal confli ct s bet ween W est ern and M usl im count ri es and
t he dis t ance bet ween t he W es t and Isl am s eem ing to be
i ncreasi ng, Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri is t he one m an who can bri dge
t he gap bet ween t he W est and Isl am. Not onl y can he sol ve the
probl ems of t he Musli m worl d but i n doi ng s o he will al so
s ol ve the probl ems faced by W est ern nati ons. If you wish to
l earn m ore about hi m and hi s organi s ati on or woul d l ike to join
his peaceful movem ent t hen do not hesi t at e t o cont act us on the
cont act det ai ls given bel ow:
Dr. Tahir-ul-Qadri
B orn :
PhD:
MQ I:
PAT:
B ooks:
L ectu res :
F eb. 19, 1951 in Jhang, P akis tan
F rom Punj ab Universit y, P aki st an in 1986.
F ounded Mi nhaj -ul -Quran Int ernat ional i n 1981.
F ounded the poli ti cal party, P akist an Awam i
T ehreek (PA T ) in 1989.
Over 250 publ ished.
Over 5000 avai l abl e on Vi deo/ Audi o cas s ett es
and VC Ds.
Minhaj-ul-Q uran Inte rnational (MQ I) :
365-M, M odel Town, Lahore, P akist an
P hone: 0092-42-111-140-140 F ax: 0092-42-5168184
htt p:// www.mi nhaj. org htt p:// www.pat. com.pk
Em ail : t ehreek@minhaj. org
Dire cto rate of Fo reign Affairs MQ I:
T el: 0092-42-5171404, F ax: 0092-42-5169114,
Em ail : dfa@mi nhaj. org
Dr. Tahir-ul-Q adri:
Em ail : qadri@minhaj. org

The Awaited Imām

Transcription

Similar documents

UI-NHON N U`NG NGA Y Llf A DAN

establishments - Christchurch Hospitality Awards

Children`s books fall 2016

The Ghadīr Declaration

SEJARAH PENDIDIKAN ISLAM - al

European - tutto arabi

Konsep Sistem Informasi

Berita Buku - Shakespot Sdn Bhd

tri`rft:rsfrutuiltrJ:vmuitrnr: :vpr`udrurryn`r: uav:vpr`udrurrynr:rfrurtrg mrlil

Kekal Abadi 27(1) 2009 - The University of Malaya Library